Yamaha YPG-535 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Sintetizador
Tipo
El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

Owner’s Manual
EN
Keyboard Stand Assembly
For information on assembling the
keyboard stand, refer to the instructions
on page 10 of this manual.
2 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO
NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one
described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recom-
mended by Yamaha.
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could
walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any
kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use
an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18
AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current han-
dling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-
pany the accessory product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the
time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify
any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing
units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and head-
phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that
could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods
of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an
audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting
fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accesso-
ries. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or
installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fix-
tures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other
uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer
before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ-
mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc-
tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with
both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the
following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-
tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,
contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being
charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries
of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or
incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter-
ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-
lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason
its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,
state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that
contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist
you, please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num-
ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.
You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur-
chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-
nent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
92-BP (bottom)
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 3
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by
the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-
able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-
tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies
and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation
of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does
not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact
Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(class B)
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den
ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også
selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS:
Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
(standby)
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard
Model Name : DGX-530/YPG-535
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is
suspected.
(FCC DoC)
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-
dance with the following code:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals
in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-
nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter-
minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of
the three pin plug.
• This applies only to products distributed by
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
(2 wires)
4 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
(3)-11 1/2
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)
only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or
overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects
on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll
anything over it.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have
the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord.
Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during
electrical storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or
rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the
internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent
adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the
instrument overheating.
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Location
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 5
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel
or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
Saving and backing up your data
The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory when
you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the
Registration Memory (page 87.)
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important
data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a computer. (pages
95, 106)
Backing up the USB storage device/external media
•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you
save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long
time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
Trademarks
The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
®
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Saving data
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your
instrument.
(3)-11 2/2
6 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for three (3) of the songs pre-installed in this
electronic keyboard:
Mona Lisa
from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A.
Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans
Copyright © 1949 (Renewed 1976) by Famous Music Corporation
International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved
Composition Title : Against All Odds
Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403
Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD
AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD
All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public perfor-
mance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited.
Can’t Help Falling In Love
from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII
Words and Music by George David Weiss,
Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore
Copyright © 1961; Renewed 1989 Gladys Music (ASCAP)
Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane
Music Publishing Company, Inc.
International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music
data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM
mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.
Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that
some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control
parameters and effects.
XF
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and
open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file con-
taining lyric data is played.
STYLE FILE
The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-
vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with
peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-
puter is on).
Copyright Notice
Panel Logos
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it
has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI
files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use
is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE
ILLEGAL COPIES.
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited
except for your personal use.
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 7
Congratulations and thank you for purchasing
the Yamaha DGX-530/YPG-535 Portable Grand!
Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument
in order to take full advantage of its various features.
Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading,
and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.
The DGX-530/YPG-535 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.
Music rest
Accessory CD-ROM
Owner’s manual (this book)
•Keyboard stand
•Footswitch
•AC Power Adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)
*May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Included Accessories
8 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Special Features of the DGX-530/YPG-535
Graded Soft Touch keyboard
Just as on an actual piano, the lower keys are heavy in touch and the higher keys are light, with soft
touch of digital keyboard for beginners.
Performance assistant technology Page 37
Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect
performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do
is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the
keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in
time with the music.
And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply
by tapping one key.
All you need is
one finger!
Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 17
With the DGX-530/YPG-535, the instrument voice that sounds when you
play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive
range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for
example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of
musical variety.
Play Along with Styles Page 26
Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.
The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-
ering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and
much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-
iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.
Easy Performance with Music Notation Display Page 35
When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the
display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If
the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear
on the score display.
* No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display func-
tion does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data.
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 9
Copyright Notice....................................................................... 6
Panel Logos ............................................................................. 6
Included Accessories ............................................................... 7
Special Features of the DGX-530/YPG-535............................. 8
Setting Up 10
Keyboard Stand Assembly................................. 10
Power Requirements.............................................................. 12
Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) ............. 12
Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)............................. 12
Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)............................ 13
Turning the Power On ............................................................ 13
Panel Controls and Terminals 14
Front Panel............................................................................. 14
Rear Panel ............................................................................. 15
Quick Guide
Changing the Display Language 16
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 17
Select and Play a Voice—MAIN............................................. 17
Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL .............................. 18
Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT 19
Play the Grand Piano Voice ................................................... 20
Fun Sounds 21
Drum Kits................................................................................ 21
Sound Effects ......................................................................... 21
The Metronome 22
Start the Metronome............................................................... 22
Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ........................................... 22
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,
and the Length of Each Beat............................................. 23
Adjusting the Metronome Volume .......................................... 24
Playing Styles 25
Select a Style Rhythm ............................................................ 25
Play Along with a Style........................................................... 26
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 30
Using Songs 31
Select and Listen to a Song ................................................... 31
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 32
Change the Song Tempo ....................................................... 32
Play the Demo Song .............................................................. 33
Types of Songs ...................................................................... 34
Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 35
Display the Lyrics ................................................................... 36
The Easy Way to Play Piano 37
CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands.................................... 38
CHORD/FREE Type—
Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only................ 40
MELODY Type—Play with One Finger .................................. 42
CHORD/MELODY—
Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right ..... 44
Select a Song For a Lesson 48
Lesson 1—Waiting ................................................................. 49
Lesson 2—Your Tempo ......................................................... 52
Lesson 3—Minus One............................................................ 53
Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn .......................... 54
Play Using the Music Database 55
Change a Song’s Style 56
Try Out the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 56
Using the Easy Song Arranger............................................... 56
Record Your Own Performance 58
Track Configuration ................................................................ 58
Recording Procedure ............................................................. 59
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs......................................... 61
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song .. 62
Backup and Initialization 63
Backup ................................................................................... 63
Initialization............................................................................. 63
Basic Operation 64
Basic Operation ......................................................................64
The Displays........................................................................... 66
MAIN Display Items ................................................................67
Reference
Play with a Variety of Effects 68
Adding Harmony..................................................................... 68
Adding Reverb........................................................................ 69
Adding Chorus........................................................................ 70
Panel Sustain .........................................................................71
Pitch Bend ..............................................................................71
Handy Performance Features 72
Tap Start................................................................................. 72
Touch Response Sensitivity ...................................................72
One Touch Setting..................................................................73
Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ...............................74
Pitch Controls .........................................................................75
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 76
Pattern Variation (Sections)....................................................76
Setting the Split Point .............................................................79
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm
(Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................... 80
Adjusting the Style Volume.....................................................80
Chord Basics ..........................................................................81
Style File................................................................................. 83
Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard ..............................83
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary..................... 84
Song Settings 85
Song Volume ..........................................................................85
A-B Repeat .............................................................................85
Muting Independent Song Parts .............................................86
Change the Melody Voice ......................................................86
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 87
Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................87
Recalling a Registration Memory............................................88
The Functions 89
Selecting and Setting Functions .............................................89
Using USB Flash Memory 92
Connecting a USB Flash Memory ..........................................92
Formatting USB Flash Memory ..............................................94
Saving Data ............................................................................95
Convert a User Song to SMF Format and Save..................... 96
Loading User Files and Style Files .........................................97
Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory ..............................98
Playing Data on a USB Flash Memory ...................................99
Connections 100
Connectors ...........................................................................100
Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................101
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer .....102
Remote Control of MIDI Devices ..........................................103
Initial Send............................................................................ 104
Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument... 104
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 107
Important Notices about the CD-ROM..................................107
CD-ROM Contents ...............................................................108
System Requirements ..........................................................109
Software Installation .............................................................109
Appendix
Troubleshooting.................................................................... 114
Messages .............................................................................116
Scores ..................................................................................118
Voice List ..............................................................................124
Drum Kit List .........................................................................128
Style List ...............................................................................130
Music Database List .............................................................131
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM..........................132
Effect Type List..................................................................... 133
MIDI Implementation Chart...................................................134
MIDI Data Format .................................................................136
Specifications .......................................................................139
Index..................................................................................... 140
Contents
10 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the
parts as needed.
z Attach the stand bases.
Making sure that the boards are facing the proper direc-
tion (the holes for the joint connectors should face inside).
The left and right side boards are the same shape. Insert the
joint connectors w into the holes as shown. The joint con-
nectors have been installed properly if you can see the
screw head on the connector.
Attach the stand bases to the bottom of the side boards,
using the 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws q. The left and
right stand bases are the same shape, and there is no differ-
ence between their front-to-back orientation. If you have
trouble screwing in the screws, use a screwdriver to rotate
the joint connectors to the appropriate position—the
mark on the joint connectors indicates the location of the
screw hole.
Keyboard Stand Assembly
Have a phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.
Read these cautions carefully before you assemble or use the keyboard stand.
These cautions are to promote safe use of the stand and to prevent injury and damage from
occurring to you and others. By following these cautions carefully, your keyboard stand will pro-
vide you with safe and prolonged use.
Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in
accordance with the sequence given below.
Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.
Use the stand after assembly is complete. An uncompleted stand may overturn or the keyboard may drop.
•Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing the stand on uneven surfaces may cause it to
become unstable or overturn, the keyboard to drop, or injury.
Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed purpose. Placing other objects on the stand
may result in the object dropping or the stand overturning.
Do not apply excessive force to the keyboard as it may cause the stand to overturn or the keyboard to
drop.
Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws have been tight and firm before use. If not, the
stand may overturn, the keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user.
•To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
CAUTION
q 6 x 70 mm roundhead
screws (4 pcs.)
Side
boards
Stand
bases
Back board
w Joint connectors (4 pcs.)
e 6 x 30 mm roundhead
screws (4 pcs.)
r 5 x 16 mm roundhead
screws (4 pcs.)
Assembly Parts
1
w Joint connectors
q 6 x 70 mm
roundhead screws
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 11
Setting Up
x Attach the back board.
Attach the back board, using the 6 x 30 mm roundhead
screws e.
c Put the keyboard on the stand.
Check the back-to-front orientation for stand, and care-
fully place the keyboard on the side boards. Slowly move
the keyboard so that the holes on the bottom of the key-
board are properly aligned with the holes on the angle
brackets.
v Install the keyboard to the stand.
Fix the keyboard to the angle brackets, using the 5 x 16
mm roundhead screws r.
2
e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screw
3–4
r 5 x 16 mm
roundhead
screws
Post-assembly checklist
Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the fol-
lowing points:
• Are there any parts left over?
If so, read the assembly instructions again and correct
any errors you might have made.
• Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable
fixtures?
If not, move the instrument to an appropriate location.
• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you
play it or move it?
If so, properly tighten all screws.
• Also, if the keyboard makes a creaking noise or
seems unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to
the assembly instructions and diagrams and
retighten all screws.
Be careful not to drop the back board or touch the sharp metal fit-
tings.
CAUTION
Be careful not to drop the keyboard or to get your fingers caught
between the keyboard and the stand parts.
CAUTION
12 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.
Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the
instrument is set to STANDBY.
Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.
Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.
The instrument speakers are automatically shut off
when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/
OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You
can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard
amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other
line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output
signal to that device.
The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain
as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha
FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain
on and off.
Power Requirements
Use the specified adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recom-
mended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may
result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the
instrument.
WARNING
Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,
or during electrical storms.
CAUTION
AC power
adaptor
AC outlet
Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)
•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long peri-
ods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be
damaging to your hearing.
WARNING
•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external
devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to
observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment
damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their
minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while
playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
CAUTION
Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)
Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUS-
TAIN jack before turning on the power.
Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this
changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed
footswitch operation.
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 13
Setting Up
Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB ter-
minal of a computer, and you can transfer performance
data and song files between the two (page 101). To use
the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the fol-
lowing:
• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-
ment is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable
to connect the instrument to the computer. After
making the connections, turn the instrument’s
power on.
• Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer.
Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on
page 109.
Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOL-
UME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON]
switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON]
switch again to turn the power OFF.
Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instru-
ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data
exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are
restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is
turned on.
Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)
Turning the Power On
Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is
still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are
not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the
AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
CAUTION
•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message
is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory
and result in a loss of data.
CAUTION
Music Rest
Insert the music rest into
the slots as shown.
14 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 13
w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 13, 64
e FILE CONTROL [MENU],
[EXECUTE] buttons................. pages 92–98
r [LYRICS] button ............................... page 36
t [SCORE] button............................... page 35
y [CHORD FINGERING] button ......... page 83
u [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.................... page 38
i [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 55
o [FUNCTION] button ................. pages 66, 89
!0 LESSON [L], [R],
[START] buttons .............................. page 49
!1 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 22
!2 [TEMPO/TAP] button ............... pages 32, 72
!3 SONG MEMORY
[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 59
!4 [REPEAT & LEARN]/
[ACMP ON/OFF] button........... pages 54, 26
!5 [A-B REPEAT]/
[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 85, 76
!6 [REW]/
[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 32, 76
!7 [FF]/[SYNC STOP] button ....... pages 32, 78
!8 [PAUSE]/
[SYNC START] button ............. pages 32, 77
!9 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 25, 32, 65
@0 [SONG] button................................. page 31
@1 [EASY SONG
ARRANGER] button........................ page 56
@2 [STYLE] button................................ page 25
@3 [VOICE] button ................................ page 17
@4 Dial ............................................pages 65, 89
@5 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]
buttons......................................pages 65, 89
@6 Number buttons [0]–[9],
[+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 65, 89
@7 [DEMO] button................................. page 33
@8 [EXIT] button ................................... page 66
@9 REGIST MEMORY
[MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons.. page 87
#0 [PORTABLE GRAND] button.......... page 20
#1 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button................... page 19
#2 [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 18
#3 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 68
#4 [PITCH BEND] wheel....................... page 71
#5 Drum Kit........................................... page 21
The illustrations next to each key indicate the
drum and percussion instruments assigned to the
keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected.
q
w
e
r t
y
u
!1 !2
io
!4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9
!0
!3
Song Category List
(page 33)
Style Category List
(page 130)
Front Panel
Front Panel
f
r
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 15
Panel Controls and Terminals
#6 CONTRAST knob............................. page 67
#7 USB TO DEVICE terminal................ page 93
USB TO HOST terminal ........... page 13, 100
#8 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 12
#9 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 12
$0 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 12
@0
@1
@2
@3
@8
@9
@5
#0 #1 #2 #3
@4
@6
@7
#6 #7 #8 #9 $0
#4
#5
Rear Panel
Music Database List
(page 131)
Voice Category List
(page 124)
Display
(pages 66, 67)
Rear Panel
16 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Changing the Display Language
This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display
language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to
Japanese the lyrics, file names, demo display, and some messages will be
displayed in Japanese where appropriate.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number of
times until the “Language” item appears.
The currently selected display language will appear below the “Lan-
guage” item.
When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the lan-
guage as required.
3
Select a display language.
The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese.
The language selection will be stored in the internal flash memory so
that it is retained even when the power is turned off.
4
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
f
r
Language item
The currently selected
language
Quick Guide
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 17
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,
this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,
strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide vari-
ety of musical sounds.
This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
The main voice selection display will appear.
The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted.
2
Select the voice you want to play.
While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The avail-
able voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice
selected here becomes the main voice.
For this example select the “102 Flute” voice.
3
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Select and Play a Voice—MAIN
The currently
selected voice num-
ber and name
Select 102 Flute
Adjusts volume.
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
18 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.
The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.
1
Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button.
The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off.
When turned on the dual voice “DUAL” will appear in the MAIN dis-
play. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the
main voice when you play the keyboard.
2
Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than
a second.
The dual voice selection display will appear.
3
Select the desired dual voice.
Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.
For this example try selecting the “120 Vibraphone” voice.
Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL
Voice Number
The currently selected dual voice
Dual voice selection display
Hold for longer than a second
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 19
4
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main
and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split
point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 79).
1
Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.
The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When
turned on the split voice “SPLIT” will appear in the MAIN display. The
currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split
point.
2
Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than
a second.
The split voice selection display will appear.
Two voices will sound at the same time.
Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT
Main voice and dual voiceSplit voice
Split point
Voice Number
The currently selected split
voice
Split voice selection display
Hold for longer than a second
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
20 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
3
Select the desired split voice.
Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice
which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example
try selecting the “038 Folk Guitar” voice.
4
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.
Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.
The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected.
Play the Grand Piano Voice
When you press the [PORTA-
BLE GRAND] button all settings
other than touch sensitivity are
turned off. The dual and split
voices will also be turned off, so
only the Grand Piano voice will
play over the entire keyboard.
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 21
Fun Sounds
This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can
use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and
much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties.
Drum Kit Selection Procedure (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17)
1 Press the [VOICE] button.
2 Use the dial to select “128 Standard Kit 1”.
3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds!
Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percus-
sion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll
hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a
comprehensive variety of drum and percussion
sounds. For details on the instruments included
in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 128 to
139), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 128.
Sound Effect Selection Procedure (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17)
1 Press the [VOICE] button.
2 Use the dial to select “139 SFX Kit 2”.
3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects!
As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a
submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, and many
other useful effects. “138 SFX Kit 1” includes lightning,
running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do
not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore pro-
duce no sound.
For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit
voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum
Kit List” on page 129.
Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other
normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at
different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound
of a different drum or percussion instrument.
The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 138 and 139). When
either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard.
Drum Kits
Sound Effects
22 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
The Metronome
Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [MET-
RONOME ON/OFF] button.
To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button
again.
1
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo set-
ting.
2
Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to 280.
Start the Metronome
4/4
Current setting
Adjusting the Metronome Tempo
Tempo
The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo
and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most com-
fortable for you.
The Metronome
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 23
In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.
1
Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for
longer than a second to select the function “Time Signa-
ture–Numerator”.
2
Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure.
A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other
beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the begin-
ning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”.
The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example.
3
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times
as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Sig-
nature–Denominator”.
4
Use the dial to select the beat length.
Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter
note, eighth note, or 16
th
note). Select 8 for this example.
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat
Hold for longer
than a second
Denominator
(The length of
one beat.)
Numerator
(Number of
beats per
measure.)
The metronome time signature
will synchronize to a style or
song that is playing, so these
parameters cannot be changed
while a style or song is playing.
NOTE
f
r
The Metronome
24 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Met-
ronome Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required.
Adjusting the Metronome Volume
f
r
Metronome volume
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 25
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Playing Styles
This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces
accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to
match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 160 dif-
ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures
(see page 130 for a complete list of the available styles).
In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.
Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro
trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played
using percussion instruments only.
1
Press the [STYLE] button.
The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number
and name will be highlighted.
2
Select a style.
Use the dial to select the style you want to use.
A list of all the available styles is provided on page 130.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The style rhythm will start playing.
Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop
playback.
Select a Style Rhythm
The currently selected style
An external style file loaded into
style number 161 can be
selected and used in the same
way as the internal styles. The
style file must be loaded into
style number 161 after transfer-
ring it to the instrument from a
computer, or after connecting a
USB flash memory device con-
taining the style file to the instru-
ment. File transfer instructions
can be found on page 104, and
load instructions are provided
on page 97.
NOTE
Style numbers 131, 143–160
have no rhythm part and there-
fore no rhythm will play if you
use them for the above exam-
ple. For these styles first turn
auto accompaniment on as
described on page 26, press the
[START/STOP] button, and the
accompaniment bass and chord
parts will begin playing when
you play a key to the left of the
keyboard split point.
NOTE
Playing Styles
26 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.
Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-
paniment that you can play along with.
1
Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.
2
Turn automatic accompaniment on.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.
Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment
off.
3
Turn sync start on.
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.
When automatic accompaniment is on ...
The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the
“auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the
accompaniment chords.
Play Along with a Style
This icon appears when
automatic accompani-
ment is on.
The keyboard split point can be
changed as required: refer to
page 79.
NOTE
Split point (54 : F#2)
Auto accompaniment region
Flashes when sync start
is on.
Playing Styles
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 27
When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a
style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard
split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function
off.
4
Play a left-hand chord to start the style.
You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.
This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try play-
ing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point.
The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you
play.
5
Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody
with your right hand.
6
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback
when you’re done.
You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.
Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 76.
Try this!
Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 28. These
examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progres-
sions sound good with the styles.
Split point
Auto accompaniment region
Split point
Auto accompaniment region
Playing Styles
28 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords
Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.
In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord
sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same
chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall
feel of the music you play.
On page 26 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital
to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take
your accompaniments to a new level.
On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the
instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively
creating a complete song.
Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Play the scores with the left hand.
Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 26.
* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to
produce the chord progressions.
—Dance music with simple chords—
This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start
again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button
and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.
Recommended Style
041 Euro Trance
Play to the left of the split point.
Split point
F
C G Am
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Playing Styles
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 29
—3-chord boogie-woogie—
This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the
progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!
—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—
This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When
you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Recommended Style
148 Piano Boogie
Recommended Style
096 Bossa Nova
F
G
F
C C
C
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
G7
E7
Dm CM7
Am A7
FM7
Bm7
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Playing Styles
30 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:
Easy Chords
Standard Chords
The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The function is called Multi Fingering.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 26). The keyboard to the left of the
split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area
of the keyboard.
Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This method lets you easily play chords in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard using only
one, two, or three fingers.
Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This method lets you produce accompaniment by
playing chords using normal fingerings in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords
C
D
b
E
b
F
#
G
#
B
b
D
b
E
b
F
#
DEFGABCDEF
Split point (default: 54/F#2)
Root notes and the corresponding keys
Accompaniment
range
•To play a major chord
Press the root note of the chord.
C
Cm
C7
Cm7
•To play a minor chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest black key to the left of it.
•To play a seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white key to the left of it.
•To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white and black keys to the left
of it (three keys altogether).
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
CmM7
CM7
C6
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
C7aug
C7sus4
Csus2
C7
Cm
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
CmM7
(
9
)
CM7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
9
)
C7
(
b9
)
C7
(
b13
)
Cm7
(
11
)
CM7
(
#11
)
C
(
b5
)
C
(
9
)
(
9
)
C6
(
9
)
Cm
(
9
)
C7
(
#11
)
C7
(
#9
)
C7
(
13
)
C7
Cm6
Cm7
C
(
b5
)
CM7
(
b5
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
CmM7
(
b5
)
How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]
* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords
will be recognized without them.
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 31
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Using Songs
With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a
piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs,
or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the
performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The
songs are organized by category.
In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly
describe the 30 songs provided.
1
Press the [SONG] button
The song selection display will appear.
The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted.
2
Select a song.
Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 33.
Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.
Listen Lesson Record
Song
Select and Listen to a Song
The currently selected song
number and name
Song files transferred from a
computer or stored on a USB
flash memory device con-
nected to the instrument can be
selected and used in the same
way as the internal Song (Song
numbers 36–). File transfer
instructions are provided on
page 104.
NOTE
The song highlighted here
can be played
Using Songs
32 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
3
Listen to the song.
Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-
ton again.
These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],
rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.
When using the song, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo
display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set
to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.
You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Song start!
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause
PAUSE
Press the pause
button to pause
playback.
REW
Press the fast
reverse button to
rapidly return to an
earlier point in the
song.
FF
Press the fast for-
ward button to rap-
idly skip ahead to
a later point in the
song.
When an A-B repeat range is
specified the fast reverse and
forward function will only work
within that range.
NOTE
Change the Song Tempo
Using Songs
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 33
Press the [DEMO] button.
The demo song will start playing. Listen to some of the outstanding instrument voices provided!
The demo song will automatically repeat from the beginning after it has played all the way through.
You can stop demo playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
Song List
These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s Easy Song Arranger feature,
songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-
gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.
: Includes chord data.
The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 16, 20 and 30 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on the
CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual.
Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original.
Category No. Name Suggested Uses
Main Demo
1 JetSet
The songs in this category have been created to
give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this
instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with
the various features.
2 Winter Serenade
3Take off
Voice Demo
4 Live! Grand Demo
These songs features some of the instrument’s
many useful voices. They make maximum use of the
characteristics of each voice, and might serve as
inspiration for your own compositions.
5 Live! Orchestra Demo
6 Cool! Rotor Organ Demo
7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo
8 Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo
Function Demo
9 Hallelujah Chorus
Use these songs to experience some of the
instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for
the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the
performance assistant technology feature.
10 Ave Maria
11 Nocturne op.9-2
Piano Solo
12 For Elise
These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as
lesson songs.
13 Maple Leaf Rag
14 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair
Piano Ensemble
15 Amazing Grace
A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also
well suited for use as lesson songs.
16 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)
17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.
18 Scarborough Fair
19 Old Folks at Home
Piano
Accompaniment
20 Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)
When you need to practice backing
(accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to
do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to
play with a band. These songs allow you to practice
backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the
easiest way to master this important skill.
21 Ep Ballad
22 Boogie Woogie
23 Rock Piano
24 Salsa
25 Country Piano
26 Gospel R&B
27 Medium Swing
28 Jazz Waltz
29 Medium Bossa
30
SlowRock (Can’t Help Falling In Love: George
David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)
Play the Demo Song
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
Using Songs
34 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
The following three types of songs can be used by the DGX-530/YPG-535.
Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument)................Song numbers 001–030.
User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.
External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.
* The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 105 for instructions on how
to transfer the songs to the instrument.
The chart below shows the basic processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song
files from storage to playback.
Types of Songs
Record
(page 58)
Connect
(page 100)
Transfer
(page 104)
Hint! : You can have some-
one play a piece and tempo-
rarily save it in a user bank
as a user song, then save it
as SMF format to the USB
memory from where it can
be used as a lesson song.
Your own
performance
Song Song
Computer USB flash memory
Song Song Song
SMF conversion
Save
Play
DGX-530/YPG-535 Song Stor-
age locations
Flash Memory USB
(036–)
User Songs
(031–035)
Preset Songs
(001–030)
The 30 songs built
into the instrument.
User songs cannot produce score display as they are. If you convert a user song file
to SMF and save it to USB flash memory, however, it becomes capable of producing
score display and can be used with the lesson features.
NOTE
Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files
transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the exter-
nal song file flash memory area, and vice versa.
NOTE
Using Songs
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 35
This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs.
Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs stored in USB flash memory or flash
memory.
And although user songs you record yourself cannot display a score as is, they can be converted to SMF
(Standard MIDI File) format and stored to USB flash memory, from where they can be played with score
display.
1
Select a song.
Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 31.
2
Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will
appear.
There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff.
These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of
the score to indicate the current location.
4
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Displaying the Song Score
Both chords and lyrics will be
shown in single-staff score dis-
play of a song that includes
chord and lyric data.
When there are many lyrics they
may be displayed in two rows a
measure.
Some lyrics or chords may be
abbreviated if the selected song
has a lot of lyrics.
Small notes that are hard to
read may be easier to read after
you use the quantize function
(page 91).
NOTE
Single-staff
Double-staff
Melody score
Marker
Chord
Lyrics
No lyrics are shown in double-
staff.
NOTE
Using Songs
36 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display.
No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed.
1
Select a song.
Select a song between 16, 20, and 30 by performing steps 1 and 2
described on page 31.
2
Press the [LYRICS] button.
The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the
display.
The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song.
Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display
Number Name
016 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)
020 Against all odds (Collins 0007403)
030 Can’t Help Falling In Love (George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)
Display the Lyrics
If the lyrics display shows gar-
bled characters, try changing
the display language (page 16).
NOTE
Songs downloaded from the
Internet or commercially avail-
able song files, including XF for-
mat files (page 6), are
compatible with the lyrics dis-
play features as long as they are
standard MIDI file format files
containing lyric data. Lyrics dis-
play may not be possible with
some files.
NOTE
Song title, lyricist,
and composer.
Lyrics and chord
display
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 37
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
The Easy Way to Play Piano
This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature
that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even
though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any
notes and still sound good! You could even just tap one key and the
results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and
can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun.
Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results
for you.
Chord...................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-bal-
anced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play
anything with both your left and right hands.
Chord/Free........... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with left-
hand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the
left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to
support the melody you are playing with your right hand.
Melody ................... This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any
keys with just one finger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve
never played a keyboard instrument before!
Chord/Melody .... Play the melody of the selected song with one finger on the right-hand
section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the
keyboard using the Chord type.
Refer to page 46 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.
Split point
Play your own melody with the right hand.
Split point
The Easy Way to Play Piano
38 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
1
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.
This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.
The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature
is on.
2
Select the CHORD type.
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the
Chord type by using the dial.
3
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a
song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave
Maria”.
When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song
can be seen in the display!
What is a Song?
You know the normal meaning of this word, but in this instrument the term
“Song” refers to the data that makes up a complete song. The performance
assistant technology features uses the chord and melody data, and should
always be used with a song (page 31).
CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands
Hold for longer than a second
Select Chord
Using Songs (page 31)
NOTE
The song displayed here will
be played.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 39
4
Press the [START/STOP] button.
Song playback will begin.
The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for
four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin play-
ing yourself from the fifth measure. The keys you should play will be
shown in the display.
5
Play on the keyboard.
Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the
same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at
measure five the notes will come out according to the score on the right.
Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will
continue to “correct” the notes that you play.
This is the performance assistant technology Chord type.
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
6
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance
assistant technology feature off.
Before After
The score for Ave Maria is pro-
vided on page 120.
NOTE
The Easy Way to Play Piano
40 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
1
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.
This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.
The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature
is on.
2
Select the CHORD/FREE type.
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the
Chord/Free type by using the dial.
3
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a
song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “011 Noc-
turne”.
CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only
Hold for longer than a second
Select
Chord/Free
Using Songs (page 31)
NOTE
The song displayed here will
be played.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 41
4
Press the [START/STOP] button.
Song playback will begin.
The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display.
5
Play on the keyboard.
Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of
the split point with your left hand.
Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an F-
A-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the
display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your
left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music.
This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type.
Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand
part in the display.
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
6
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance
assistant technology feature off.
Split point
With this type notes played on the
left-hand side of the split point will
actually sound an octave higher.
The score for Nocturne is pro-
vided on page 122.
NOTE
The Easy Way to Play Piano
42 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
See page 46 for some hints on how to play melodies.
1
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.
This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.
The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature
is on.
2
Select the MELODY type.
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Mel-
ody type by using the dial.
3
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a
song by using the dial.
MELODY Type—Play with One Finger
Select Melody
Hold for longer than a second
Using Songs (page 31)
NOTE
The song displayed here will
be played.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 43
4
Press the [START/STOP] button.
Song playback will begin.
Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not
sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself (step 5).
5
Play on the keyboard.
To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then tap a key with one fin-
ger of your right hand in time with the music. You can play any key. If
you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE]
button to call up the melody score in the display.
How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one finger
thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type!
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
6
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance
assistant technology feature off.
Song start!
Sounds like a
melody!
The Easy Way to Play Piano
44 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
1
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.
This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.
The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature
is on.
2
Select the CHORD/MELODY type.
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the
Chord/Melody type by using the dial.
3
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a
song by using the dial.
CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right
Select
Chord/Melody
Hold for longer than a second
Using Songs (page 31)
NOTE
The song displayed here will
be played.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 45
4
Press the [START/STOP] button.
Song playback will begin.
The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to eight measures while memoriz-
ing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ninth mea-
sure.
5
Play on the keyboard.
Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of
the split point with your left hand.
Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand.
You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split
point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases
with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song
melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your
left hand.
This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type.
If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the
[SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display.
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
6
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance
assistant technology feature off.
Split point
With this type notes played on the
left-hand side of the split point will
actually sound an octave higher.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
46 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!
Here are a few hints for using the Chord type.
If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the
keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the left-
hand section of the keyboard.
To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands
spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately
with your left and right hands (any notes will do).
How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you
play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type!
Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of
playing produce different results.
Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a
melody with your right ... or any other combination.
The chord information
included in the song is
displayed in the lower
area of the MAIN display.
You will get even better
results if you match your
left-hand rhythm to rhythm
of the chord indicator in
the display.
Sounds like you’re
playing the right
notes!
Play with the left and right hands
at the same timing—type 1.
Play with the left and right hands
at the same timing—type 2.
Play alternately with the left
and right hands—type 3.
Play 3 notes at once
with your right hand.
Play 1 note at a time with your right
hand (for example: index finger
middle finger
ring finger).
Play 3 notes at once
with your right hand.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 47
Make Use of the Score in the Melody Type.
If you want to play the melody with the correct rhythm, use the onscreen
score feature.
Displaying the Score.
After performing steps 1 to 4 on page 42, press the [SCORE] button.
The melody score will appear.
The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback.
If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score
you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm.
Songs That Can Be Used With the performance assistant technology.
When the Chord type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that
include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only
work with songs that include melody data. In order to find out if a song includes the required data, first
select the song and then press the [SCORE] button. If chords appear on the display when you press the
[SCORE] button you can use the Chord type or any combination type that includes the Chord type. If
melody appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Melody type or any
combination type that includes the Melody type.
External Songs and the performance assistant technology.
Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as
long as they include the required chord and/or melody data.
See page 105 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument.
Chord
Marker
Melody
Play while watching the
marker
48 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Select a Song For a Lesson
Yamaha Education Suite
You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or
both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0)
downloaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (page 104)
During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can
even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you
can handle. It’s never too late to start learning!
Lesson Flow:
Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!
The practice methods:
Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.
Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing.
Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song.
Select the
song you want
to learn.
Select the part you want
to work on (right hand,
left hand, both ha
nds).
Select lesson
1, 2, or 3.
Lesson
start!
Select a Song For a Lesson
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 49
In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you
play the right note.
1
Select a song for your lesson.
Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want
to use for your lesson. As listed on page 33 there are a variety of song
types.
2
Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
3
Select the part you want to practice.
Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand
lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-
hands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right cor-
ner of the display.
Lesson 1—Waiting
Select R for right-hand lesson.
Select L for left-hand lesson.
Select LR for bothhands lesson.
Select a Song For a Lesson
50 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
4
Start Lesson 1.
Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the
LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in
sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Lesson 1 ... An
explanation of the selected lesson will appear on the display for a few
seconds before the lesson begins.
Song playback will begin automatically when you select
Lesson 1.
Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played
is indicated by a dot () on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen
keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the
next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the
correct note. The triangular marker () above the score indicates play-
back progress.
If the score display is not ready
by the time the explanation dis-
play disappears, prepare-in-
progress message will appear
on the display until the score is
ready.
NOTE
(Lesson 1)
(Lesson 2)
(Lesson 3)
(Song Lesson off)
In this case the “R1” indicates that right-
hand lesson 1 has been selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Marker
Marker
Select a Song For a Lesson
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 51
5
Stop the Lesson mode
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.
See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again
from the beginning.
Shifting the keyboard left or right.
The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by
pressing the [+] or [-] button.
61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. The DGX-530/
YPG-535 actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or
low notes, those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be
shown on the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or
right of the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard
left or right so you can see the notes (the marker will appear on the
appropriate key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the
keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson.
The displayed range (61 keys)
Actual keyboard range (DGX-530/YPG-535 = 88 keys)
When the lesson song has played all the way
through your performance will be evaluated in 4
levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent.
“Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.
The evaluation feature can be
turned off via the FUNCTION
Grade item (page 91).
NOTE
Select a Song For a Lesson
52 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed
you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own
pace.
1
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and
3 on page 49).
2
Start Lesson 2.
Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-
son 1 ...
Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is
selected.
The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to
indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct
timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo
will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original
tempo.
3
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.
Lesson 2—Your Tempo
In this case the “R2” indicates
that right-hand lesson 2 has
been selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Play while following the
score marker
Select a Song For a Lesson
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 53
Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you
have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song.
1
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and
3 on page 49).
2
Start Lesson 3.
Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-
son 1 ...
Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is
selected.
Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard
marker in the display will indicate the notes to play.
3
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Lesson 3—Minus One
In this case the “R3” indicates
that right-hand lesson 3 has
been selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Marker
Marker
Select a Song For a Lesson
54 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to
repeatedly practice a section you find difficult.
Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson.
The song location will move back four measures from the point at
which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-
sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you
pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four mea-
sures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all
you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you
make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it
right
Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn
•You can change the number of
measures the Repeat and learn
function jumps back by pressing
a number button [1]–[9] during
repeat playback.
NOTE
Press imme-
diately
Oops!
A mistake!
e Jump back 4 measures and
repeat playback
q
w
Song playback
direction
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 55
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Play Using the Music Database
You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to
select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...
simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel
settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of
sounds and style!
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
A Music Database list will appear in the display.
2
Select a Music Database.
Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 131 of
the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that
matches the image of the song you intend to play.
For this example select the “158 Patrol”.
3
Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your
right.
The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the
left of the split point (page 26). Refer to pages 28–30 for information
about playing chords.
If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this
point you can check the assigned voice and style.
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
Music Database (MDB) files
transferred from a computer or
stored on a USB flash memory
device connected to the instru-
ment can be selected and used
in the same way as the internal
Music Databases (MDB num-
bers 301–). File transfer instruc-
tions are provided on page 104.
NOTE
Split Point
56 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Change a Song’s Style
In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to
play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you
can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova,
as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by
changing the style with which a song is played.
You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for
a complete change of image.
You can try out the Easy Song Arranger feature using the internal Hallelujah Chorus song.
Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009
Hallelujah Chorus. Press the [START/STOP] button begin
playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song
Arranger feature will appear on the display.
As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall
image of the song.
Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other
songs as well—any songs that include chord data.
1
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.
The Song Select display will appear. The currently selected song name
and number will be highlighted.
2
Select a Song.
Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange.
Try Out the Easy Song Arranger
The score for Hallelujah Chorus
is provided on page 118.
NOTE
Using the Easy Song Arranger
The currently selected song
number and name are dis-
played here.
Change a Song’s Style
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 57
3
Listen to the song.
Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move
on to the next step while the song is playing.
4
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.
The Style Select display will appear. The currently selected style name
and number will be highlighted.
5
Select a style.
Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles.
As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only
the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to
the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the
song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button).
6
Select a voice part.
If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a
voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be
selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button.
7
Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.
Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody
voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice
changes (if you have stopped the song, start it again by pressing the
[START/STOP] button).
When playing song numbers
010, 011, and 020 to 030 while
using the Easy Song Arranger,
melody tracks will be automati-
cally muted and no melody will
sound. In order to hear the mel-
ody tracks you will need to press
the SONG MEMORY buttons [3]
to [5].
NOTE
Song start!
The currently selected style
number and name are dis-
played here.
Because the Easy Song
Arranger uses song data you
can’t specify chords by playing
in the accompaniment range of
the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/
OFF] button will not function.
If the time signature of the song
and style are different, the time
signature of the song will be
used.
NOTE
Hold for longer than a second
The Melody R and Melody
L displays will be selected
alternately each time you
press the [VOICE] button.
The currently selected mel-
ody voice will be displayed.
The Difference Between
MELODY R and MELODY
L ...
Songs are a combination of a
melody and an auto-accompani-
ment style. Normally “melody”
refers to the right-hand part, but
in this instrument “melody” parts
are provided for both the right
and left hands. MELODY R is
the melody part played by the
right hand, and MELODY L is
the melody part played by the
left hand.
NOTE
58 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Record Your Own Performance
You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as
user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved
as user songs, they can be converted to SMF (Standard MID File) for-
mat files and saved to USB flash memory (page 96) and used with
score display. So when inspiration strikes and you create a great mel-
ody, you can save it in both listenable and written score form.
Recordable Data
You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track.
Each track can be recorded individually.
Melody Track [1]–[5]...........Record the melody parts.
Style Track [A] ....................Records the chord part.
To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the
track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later.
Up to approximately 10,000
notes can be recorded for the
five user songs if you record
only to the melody tracks. Up to
approximately 5,500 chord
changes can be recorded for
the five user songs if you record
only to the style track.
User songs cannot display a
score as is, but they can be con-
verted to SMF (Standard MIDI
File) format and stored to USB
flash memory (page 96), from
which they can be played with
score display.
NOTE
Track Configuration
Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody
part (MELODY R)
Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody
part (MELODY L)
Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” perfor-
mance data.
Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accom-
paniment) part.
The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L ...
Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accom-
paniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand
part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for
both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody
part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the mel-
ody part played by the left hand.
NOTE
Melody Chords
Specify
track(s) and
record
Tra ck
1
Tra ck
2
Tra ck
3
Tra ck
4
Tra ck
5
Tra ck
A
Right-hand
melody
Left-hand
melody
Other perfor-
mance data
Style
The parts played by each track
when a user song is played back.
Record Your Own Performance
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 59
1
From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use
the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you
want to record to.
2
Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your
selection on the display.
Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track
Together
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-
ing the [REC] button.
Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.
The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display.
Record a Melody track
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-
ing the [REC] button.
The selected track will be highlighted in the display.
To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a sec-
ond time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while
recording is in progress.
Recording Procedure
Rotate the dial to select a
song number between 031
and 035.
If you record to track that con-
tains previously-recorded
data the previous data will be
overwritten and lost.
CAUTION
Style accompaniment is auto-
matically turned on when you
select the style track [A] for
recording.
Style accompaniment cannot
turned on or off while recording
is in progress.
NOTE
Press and hold
If style accompaniment is on
and track [A] has not yet been
recorded, the style track [A] will
automatically be selected for
recording when a melody track
is selected. If you only want to
record a melody track, be sure
to turn the style track [A] off.
NOTE
Record Your Own Performance
60 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
3
Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.
4
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC]
button.
If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style
track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will
stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to
001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a
box border.
5
When the recording is done ...
To Play Back a User Song
User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 31).
1 Press the [SONG] button from the MAIN display.
2 The current song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial
to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.
3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.
To Save a User Song to USB flash memory page 95
To save a User Song to USB flash memory in SMF format
page 96.
To Record Other Tracks
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks.
By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],
[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded
tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute
previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display)
while recording new tracks.
To Re-record a Track
Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal
way.
The new material will overwrite the previous data.
If the memory becomes full dur-
ing recording a warning mes-
sage will appear and recording
will stop automatically. Use the
song clear or track clear (page
61) function to delete unwanted
data and make more room avail-
able for recording, then do the
recording again.
NOTE
Recording
starts
Current measure
or
Record Your Own Performance
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 61
This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).
1
From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you
want to clear.
2
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer
than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
3
Press the [+] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.
4
Press the [+] button to clear the song.
The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the song is being cleared.
Data that cannot be recorded
Split voice
The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes
made during the song will not be recorded.
Reverb type, Chorus type, Time signature, Style number, Style volume,
Tempo (When the style track is recorded)
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs
If you only want to clear a spe-
cific track from a user song use
the Track Clear function.
NOTE
Hold for longer than a second
Press and hold
•To execute the Song Clear func-
tion press the [+] button. Press
[-] to cancel the Song Clear
operation.
NOTE
Record Your Own Performance
62 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song.
1
From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you
want to clear.
2
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],
[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for
longer than a second.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
3
Press the [+] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.
4
Press the [+] button to clear the track.
The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the track is being cleared.
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song
Hold for longer than a second
•To execute the Track Clear func-
tion press the [+] button. Press
[-] to cancel the Track Clear
operation.
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 63
Backup and Initialization
The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you
want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.
This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default set-
tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.
Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user set-
ting, registration memory, user songs, style file—turn the power on by
pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white
key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default
values restored.
Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To clear song, style and music database files that have been transferred
to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by
pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the
highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys.
The Backup Parameters
User Songs
Style Files
•Registration Memory
FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume,
Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Language Selection,
Panel Sustain, Master EQ type, Chord Fingering
Backup
Initialization
When you execute the Flash
Clear operation, data you
have purchased will also be
cleared. Be sure to save data
you want to keep to a com-
puter.
CAUTION
64 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
Overall DGX-530/YPG-535 control is based on the following simple operations.
1 Press a button to select a basic function.
Basic Operation
1 Press a button to select a basic function.
2 Use the dial to select an item or value.
3 Start a function.
Display (pages 66, 67)
Volume Adjustment
Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the
instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones
plugged into the PHONES jack.
Rotate counter-
clockwise to lower
the volume.
Rotate clockwise to
increase the vol-
ume.
3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value.1 Select a basic function.
Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.
Select an auto-accompaniment style.
Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.
Basic Operation
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 65
2 Use the dial to select an item or value
When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display.
You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.
Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3 Start a function.
This is the [START/STOP] button.
Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]
button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).
The currently selected item is high-
lighted in the display. In this example the
[VOICE] button has been pressed.
Dial
Rotate the dial clockwise to
increase the value of the selected
item, or counterclockwise to
decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial
continuously to continuously
increase or decrease the value.
[+] and [-] Buttons
Press the [+] button briefly to incre-
ment the value by 1, or press the [-]
button briefly to decrement the
value by 1. Press and hold either
button to continuously increment or
decrement the value in the corre-
sponding direction.
Number Buttons [0]–[9]
The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song num-
ber or parameter value.
Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see
below).
Decrease Increase
Press briefly
to decre-
ment.
Press briefly
to incre-
ment.
Example: Song number “003”
can be entered in three ways.
[0] [0] [3]
[0] [3]
(“003” will appear on the dis-
play after a brief delay)
[3]
(“003” will appear on the dis-
play after a brief delay)
Press number buttons
[0], [0], [3].
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]
buttons
When selecting a song, style, or voice,
you can use these buttons to jump to the
first item in the next or previous cate-
gory.
The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for select-
ing categorized items, as in the example below.
Example: VOICE SELECT Display
In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if
you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select
the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or
[+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly
handy when you have to select from a large number of voices.
f
r
Jump to the first item
in the next or previ-
ous category.
f
r
The first voice in the selected
category is selected.
Select the category shown
here.
CATEGORY button [ ] mark.
r
CATEGORY button [ ] mark.
f
f
r
In most procedures described throughout this owner’s
manual the dial is recommended for selection simply
because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection
method. Please note however, that most items or values
that can be selected using the dial can also be selected
using the [+] and [-] buttons.
Basic Operation
66 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Display Names
All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for differ-
ent modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display.
MAIN Display
FUNCTION Display (page 89)
The FUNCTION display provides access to 46 utility functions.
The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you
can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 65) to select 46 different groups of functions. Press the
CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the
dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required.
To Return To the MAIN Display
Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN
display.
You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the
[EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel.
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that
the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call
up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a
range of functions.
The Displays
Title
f
r
Function item
Value
Basic Operation
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 67
The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.
It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.
MAIN Display Items
* Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on
the rear panel of the instrument for opti-
mum display legibility.
Transpose
Tempo
A-B Repeat
Appears when repeat
playback is engaged.
Measure Number
Function ON/Off Icons
Dual
Appears when the Dual Voice is
on. When this icon is showing a
second voice is “layered” on and
played with the main voice.
Split
Appears when the Split Voice is
on. When this icon is showing
different voices can be played to
the left and right of the keyboard
split point.
Performance assistant technology
Appears when the performance
assistant technology is on.
Harmony
Appears when Harmony is on.
When this icon is showing har-
mony notes will be added to the
main voice.
File Control
When this icon is showing you
can control file operations.
Chord
Display
Style (Auto-accompaniment)
Status (page 26)
Appears when the [ACMP ON/
OFF] button is pressed to turn
accompaniment on after selecting
a style. When showing the key-
board range to the left of the split
point is used for accompaniment
chord recognition.
Appears when the synchro-stop
function is engaged.
The style pattern name.
Registration Memory
Status (page 87)
Shows the selected bank
number.
Shows the memory num-
bers that contain data. A
border appears around
the selected number.
Song Track Status
(pages 58, 86)
Highlighted during user song
recording.
The track(s) selected for
recording are highlighted dur-
ing user-song recording. Only
tracks that contain data are dis-
played. A border appears
around a selected track that
contains data. No border
appears around a Muted track.
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
68 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Play with a Variety of Effects
This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.
1
Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button
to turn Harmony feature on.
To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY
ON/OFF] button again.
2
Press and hold the [HARMONY] button
for longer than a second.
The currently selected harmony type will be
displayed.
3
Use the dial to select a harmony type.
Refer to the
Effect Type List
on page 133 for
information about the available harmony types.
Try playing the keyboard with the harmony
function. The effect and operation of each Har-
mony Type is different-refer to the below section
“How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as
the Effect Type List for details.
Adding Harmony
When harmony
is on the har-
mony icon will
appear in the
display.
When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature
on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main
voice is automatically selected.
NOTE
Hold for longer than
a second.
The currently selected harmony type
The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual
or Split Voices.
The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony
notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).
NOTE
How to sound each Harmony Type
Harmony type 01 to 05
Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)
Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the
Auto Accompaniment is on (page 26).
Hold down two
keys.
Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)
Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)
You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function
Settings (page 91).
Keep holding
down the keys.
Keep holding
down the keys.
Reference
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 69
Play with a Variety of Effects
Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience.
When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you
want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List on
page 133 for information about the available reverb types.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up
the FUNCTION display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Reverb Type item.
3
Use the dial to select a reverb type.
You can check how the selected reverb type
sounds by playing on the keyboard.
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 133 for
information about the available reverb types.
Adjusting the Reverb Level
You can individually adjust the amount of reverb
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.
(See page 90).
Adding Reverb
f
r
Reverb Type item
Selected reverb type.
70 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Play with a Variety of Effects
The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.
When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If
you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up
the FUNCTION display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Chorus Type item.
3
Use the dial to select a chorus type.
You can check how the selected chorus type
sounds by playing on the keyboard.
Adjusting the Chorus Level
You can individually adjust the amount of chorus
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.
(See page 90).
Adding Chorus
f
r
Chorus Type item
Selected chorus type.
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 71
Play with a Variety of Effects
This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all
times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up
the FUNCTION display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Sustain item.
The current setting is displayed.
3
You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons
to turn panel sustain on or off.
The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll
the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch.
If you use this feature with a voice such as the “045 Overdriven” guitar voice (page 17), you can produce
remarkably realistic string-bending effects.
You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 90.
Panel Sustain
f
r
The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the
panel sustain function is turned on.
NOTE
Pitch Bend
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
72 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times
for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song
playback by pressing the button just twice.
You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
The currently selected function will appear in
the display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Touch Sensitivity
item.
The currently selected touch sensitivity will be
displayed.
3
Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity
setting between 1 and 3. Higher values
produce greater (easier) volume varia-
tion in response to keyboard dynamics
—i.e. greater sensitivity.
A setting of “4” results in a fixed touch
response, or no level change no matter how
hard or how soft you play the keys.
Tap Start
Touch Response Sensitivity
f
r
Touch Sensitivity item
The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 73
Handy Performance Features
Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting
feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select
voice number “000” to activate this feature.
1
Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2
on page 17).
2
Select and play back any song (steps 1
to 3 on page 31).
3
Play the keyboard and remember the
sound of the voice.
If you have stopped playback at some point
during this procedure press the [START/STOP]
button to start playback again.
4
Use the dial to change songs, then play
the keyboard and listen to the voice.
You should hear a different keyboard voice
than you played in step 3. Watch the display
while changing songs and you will see that dif-
ferent voices are selected for each song.
One Touch Setting
Use the dial to select
voice number 000.
74 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listen-
ing through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external
speaker system.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
The currently selected function will appear in
the display.
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons as many times as necessary to
select the master EQ type function
“Master EQ Type”.
The currently selected EQ type will appear.
3
Use the dial to select the desired Master
EQ setting.
Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and
2 are best for listening via the instrument’s
built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones,
and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via
external speakers.
Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound
f
r
The currently selected
master EQ type.
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 75
Handy Performance Features
Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)
The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted
up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone
increments.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Transpose item.
3
Use the dial to set the transpose value
between -12 and +12 as required.
Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)
The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted
up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent
increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Tuning item.
3
Use the dial to set the tuning value
between -100 and +100 as required.
Pitch Controls
f
r
Transpose item
Can be set between -12 and +12
The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.
NOTE
f
r
Can be set between -100 and +100
Tuning item
The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.
NOTE
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
76 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 25 of
the Quick Guide.
Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-
dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.
The DGX-530/YPG-535 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement
of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing.
INTRO section
This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the
main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
MAIN section
This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats
indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A
and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left
hand.
Fill-in section
This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.
ENDING section
This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops
automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
Pattern Variation (Sections)
Main A/BIntro
Auto fillEnding
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 77
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
1
Press the [STYLE] button and then
select a style.
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to
turn auto accompaniment on.
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
synchro start on.
4
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
You’re now ready to play the intro.
6
As soon as you play a chord with your
left hand, the Intro of the selected Style
starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as
shown below). For information on how to enter
chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment
Chords” on page 30.
Synchro Start
When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,
style playback will begin as soon as you play a
chord in the accompaniment range of the
keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start
standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START]
button again.
Appears when auto
accompaniment is on.
The indicator will flash when the
synchro start standby mode will
be engaged.
The name of the selected sec-
tion—MAIN A or MAIN B—will
be displayed.
Split point
Accompaniment range
78 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
7
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly
into the selected main section A/B.
8
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
This switches to the ending section.
When the ending is finished, the auto accompa-
niment stops automatically. You can have the
ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by
pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button
again while the ending is playing back.
Synchro Stop
When this function is selected the accompaniment
style will only play while you are playing chords
in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Style playback will stop when you release the
keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC
STOP] button.
The style will play
while you are playing
the keys
Style playback will
stop when you
release the keys
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 79
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the
procedure described below.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Split point item.
3
Use the dial to set the split point to any
key from 000 (C-2) through 127 (G8).
Setting the Split Point
f
r
Split point (54 : F#2)
Main voice
Split voice
When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point
also changes.
The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.
The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played.
NOTE
•You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]
button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the
item (page 89).
f
r
NOTE
80 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play
chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the
accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the
instrument can be used (page 30).
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn
auto accompaniment on after pressing the
[STYLE] button.
Press the [STYLE] button to engage the
style function.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Style Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the style volume
between 000 and 127.
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)
Appears when auto
accompaniment is
on
Accompaniment range
Adjusting the Style Volume
f
r
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 81
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.
The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the
root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,
for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the
C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale).
In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the
chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for
the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and
anchors the other chord notes.
The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.
The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad
is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-
tional chords, as shown below.
The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create
different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by
choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).
Reading Chord Names
Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord
(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the
chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a
major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.
Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the DGX-530/YPG-535.)
Chord Basics
3rd
3rd
Root
Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)
CM Cm Caug Cdim
Major chord
Minor 3rd
Major 3rd
Major 3rd
Minor 3rd
Major 3rd
Major 3rd
Minor 3rd
Minor 3rd
Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord
Cm
Root note Chord type
Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7
C7
(
b5
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
C7sus4
CmM7
Perfect 5
th
Perfect 4
th
Flatted 7
th
Major chord Flatted 7
th
Minor chord Major 7
th
Major chord
Major 7
th
Minor chord Flatted 5
th
7
th
chord
Flatted 5
th
Minor 7
th
chord
Flatted 7
th
Suspended
4
th
chord
Suspended 4
th
7
th
Minor 7
th
Major 7
th
7
th
, suspended 4
th
Minor 7
th
, flatted 5
th
7
th
, flatted 5
th
Minor/major 7
th
82 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.
* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.
Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display
Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C
Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C
9
Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6
Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6
9
*
Major seventh [M7]
1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - 7
CM7
Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7
9
*
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7
CM7
#11
*
Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C
b5
*
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7
b5
*
Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4
Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5Caug
Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug *
Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm
Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm9
Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6
Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7
Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7
9
Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7
11
*
Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
9
*
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7Cm7
b5
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7
b5
*
Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5Cdim
Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7
Seventh [7]
1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7
C7
Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
b9
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7
b13
Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
9
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7
C7
#11
Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7
13
Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
#9
Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7
b5
*
Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7C7aug
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7C7sus4
Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2 *
C
C
(
9
)
C6
(
9
)
C6
CM7
CM7
(
9
)
CM7
(
#11
)
C
(
b5
)
CM7
(
b5
)
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
Cm
(
9
)
Cm
Cm6
Cm7
Cm7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
11
)
CmM7
CmM7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
CmM7
(
b5
)
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
C7
(
b9
)
C7
(
b13
)
(
9
)
C7
(
#11
)
C7
(
13
)
C7
(
#9
)
C7
C7b5
C7aug
C7sus4
Csus2
Notes in parentheses can be omitted.
Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-
niment based only on the root.
•A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root
and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords.
The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions
can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7
b
5, 6, m6, sus4,
aug, dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), sus2.
NOTE
•Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the
notes shown in parentheses are omitted.
The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related
chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the
minor seventh).
•Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played
chord.
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 83
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
This instrument features 160 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and
others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style
number 161 and used in the same way as the internal styles. For details on loading the style file, see “Load-
ing User Files and Style Files” on page 97.
In order to load a style file it is necessary to first either transfer the style file to the instrument from a com-
puter, or connect a USB flash memory containing the style file to the USB TO DEVICE connector. Refer to
“Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer” on page 102 for details on the file transfer proce-
dure. If you use a USB flash memory refer to “Loading User Files and Style Files” on page 97.
In “Play Along with a Style” on page 26 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were
detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however,
chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even
more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 30) can be
detected.
1
Press the [CHORD FINGERING] button
to select the function “Chord Finger-
ing”.
2
Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”.
Style File
Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard
84 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.
It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.
1
Press and hold the LESSON [START]
button for longer than a second.
2
As an example, we’ll learn how to play a
GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the
“G” key in the section of the keyboard
labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t
sound.) The root note you set is shown
in the display.
3
Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in
the section of the keyboard labeled
“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t
sound.) The notes you should play for
the specified chord (root note and
chord type) are shown in the display,
both as notation and in the keyboard
diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord,
press the [+]/[-] buttons.
4
Try playing a chord in the auto accom-
paniment section of the keyboard,
checking the indications in the display.
When you’ve played the chord properly,
a bell sound signals your success and
the chord name in the display flash.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary
Hold for longer than a second
Notation of chord Chord name (root and type)
Individual notes of chord (keyboard)
About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only
by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when
specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after
pressing the root note.
Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand
notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the per-
formance assistant technology feature.
NOTE
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 85
Song Settings
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Song Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the song volume
between 000 and 127.
You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the
start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat
playback.
1
Play the song (page 31) and press the
[A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning
of the section you want to repeat (the
“A” point).
2
Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-
ond time at the end of the section you
want to repeat (the “B” point).
3
The specified A-B section of the song
will now play repeatedly.
You can stop repeat playback at any time by
pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.
Song Volume
f
r
Can be set between 000 and 127
Song volume item
Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.
NOTE
A-B Repeat
AB
The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure
increments.
The current measure number is shown in the display during play-
back.
If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song
press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song.
NOTE
86 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Song Settings
Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the
song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.
You can mute individual tracks and play the muted
part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute
tracks other than the ones you want to listen to.
Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons
to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The
border around the track number in the display dis-
appears when that track is muted.
Refer to page 58 for information about the song
track configuration.
You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.
Press the lesson [L] and [R] buttons simul-
taneously so that “LR” appears in the
upper right corner of the MAIN display.
Select the song and play it.
1
Press the [VOICE] button for longer
than a second.
The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MEL-
ODY L) display will appear so you can select
the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the
[VOICE] button alternates between VOICE
SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L.
2
Use the dial to select the voice.
As you select different melody voices, only the
melody voice changes while the song will
remain the same.
Muting Independent Song Parts
Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted.
No track number ... no data.
Track number without border
... track contains data but is muted.
Change the Melody Voice
•You cannot change the melody voice of a user song.
NOTE
Hold for longer
than a second
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 87
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings
This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-
tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved
(8 banks of two setups each).
1
Set the panel controls as required—
select a voice, accompaniment style,
etc.
2
Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A
bank number will appear in the display
when you release the button.
3
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select a bank number from 1 to
8.
4
Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]
button while holding the [MEMORY/
BANK] button to store the current panel
settings to the specified registration
memory.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display in order to check the bank and registra-
tion memory numbers.
8 Banks
Memory 1
Up to 16 presets (eight
banks of two each) can
be memorized.
Memory 2
Saving to the Registration Memory
Bank number
Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-
back.
NOTE
Bank number
•You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration
memory button into USB flash memory as the user file or to a com-
puter as the backup file.
NOTE
If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains
data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.
NOTE
Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-
tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.
CAUTION
88 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings
1
Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A
bank number will appear in the display
when you release the button.
2
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select bank you want to recall.
You can check whether the panel settings are
stored in registration memory 1 or 2 by press-
ing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
3
Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]
or [2], containing the settings you want
to recall. The panel controls will be
instantly set accordingly.
Recalling a Registration Memory
Bank number
Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-
tion Memory
Style settings*
Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,
Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),
Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering
Voice settings
Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,
Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level),
Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice
number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level),
Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,
Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,
Reverb Level, Chorus Level)
Effect settings
Reverb Type, Chorus Type,
Panel Sustain ON/OFF
Harmony settings
Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,
Harmony Volume
Other settings
Transpose, Pitch Bend Range
* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when
using the Song features.
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 89
The Functions
The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-
ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-
tion list starting on the opposite page. There are 46 function parameters in all.
When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display
name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required.
1
Find the function you want to set in the
list that begins on page 90.
2
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3
Select a function.
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as
many times as necessary until the function’s
display name appears in the display.
4
Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or
the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the
selected function as required.
The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/
OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.
In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-
tion of the selected function, and the [-] will
cancel the selection.
Some Function settings are stored in memory
as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup
Parameters” on page 63 for information on the
function settings that are stored on the instru-
ment. To restore all initial factor default set-
tings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure
described in the “Initialization” section on page
63.
Selecting and Setting Functions
f
r
Previous itemFunction category Next item
The selected function
Value
Direct numeric
entry.
Increment value by 1.
•ON
•Execute
Decrement value by 1.
OFF
Cancel
Press simultaneously to
recall the default setting.
90 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
The Functions
Function Setting List
Category Function Item Range/Settings Description
VOLUME
Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.
Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.
OVERALL
Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.
Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.
Pitch Bend Range 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.
Split Point 000–127(C-2–G8)
Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in
other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)
voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are
automatically set to the same value.
Touch Sensitivity
1(Soft), 2(Medium),
3(Hard), 4 (Off)
Determines the sensitivity of the feature.
Chord Fingering
1(Multi Finger),
2(FullKeyboard)
Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal
chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In
the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard
will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well.
MAIN VOICE
Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.
Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.
Main Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results
in the sound being panned full right.
Main Reverb Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Main Chorus Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
DUAL VOICE
Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.
Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.
Dual Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results
in the sound being panned full right.
Dual Reverb Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Dual Chorus Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
SPLIT VOICE
Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.
Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.
Split Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results
in the sound being panned full right.
Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.
Split Chorus Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
EFFECT
Reverb Type 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 133)
Chorus Type 1–5 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 133)
Sustain ON/OFF
Determines whether or not panel sustain is always applied to the MAIN/
DUAL voices. Panel sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not
applied when OFF. (page 71)
Master EQ Type
1(Speaker 1),
2(Speaker 2),
3(Headphones),
4(Line Out 1),
5(Line Out 2)
Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in
different listening situations.
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 91
The Functions
* All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously.
(The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)
HARMONY
Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 133)
Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.
PAT P.A.T. Type
CHORD,
CHORD/FREE,
MELODY,
CHORD/MELODY
Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. (See the list
on page 37)
PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 102).
MIDI
Local ON/OFF
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone
generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 102)
External Clock ON/OFF
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock
(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 102)
Keyboard Out ON/OFF
Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is
transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).
Style Out ON/OFF
Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)
during Style playback.
Song Out ON/OFF
Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)
during Song playback.
Initial Setup YES/NO
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to
send, or press [-] to cancel.
METRONOME
Time Signature -
Numerator
00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
Time Signature -
Denominator
2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat.
Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
SCORE Quantize
1(1/4 note),
2(1/4 note triplet),
3(1/8 note),
4(1/8 note triplet),
5(1/16 note),
6(1/16 note triplet),
7(1/32 note),
8(1/32 note triplet)
Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by
adjusting the timing of the notes.
This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For
example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you
should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this
value will not be shown in the score.
LESSON
Right-Part GuideTrack 1–16
Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting
is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer.
Left-Part GuideTrack 1–16
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is
only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer.
Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.
UTILITY Demo Cancel ON/OFF
Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON,
the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed.
LANGUAGE Language English/Japanese
Determines the display language for the demo displays, song file names,
lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are
displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the file names are
displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language
setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting
exists, the setting here is used.
Category Function Item Range/Settings Description
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
92 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Using USB Flash Memory
USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data.
When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,
user songs created on the instrument and the registered settings can be saved to or
loaded from the memory medium. USB flash memory can also be used to transfer song
data downloaded from the Internet to the instrument, where it can be used with the per-
formance assistant technology (page 37) and Lesson (page 48) features described in
the Quick Guide. Furthermore, user songs saved to USB flash memory in MIDI file for-
mat can also be used with these features.
In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash
memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them.
Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO
DEVICE terminal” section on page 93, and the “Using USB Storage Devices” section on
page 93.
1
Connect a USB flash memory to the
USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful
to insert it with the proper orientation.
2
Check that the file control icon is shown
in the MAIN display.
You can go to the FILE CONTROL display
from which you can access USB flash memory
operations by pressing the [MENU] button
from this display.
(Do not press this button now, but only when
instructed to in the sections below.)
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
A message (information or confirmation
dialog) sometimes appears on the display to
facilitate operation. Refer to the “Messages”
on page 116 for an explanation of each
message.
Menu Reference Page
Format 94
Save 95
SMF Save 96
Load 97
Delete 98
File Control
Icon
Appears while
the memory
device is being
mounted.
No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE
CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related
to file functions will be active.
The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following
cases:
During style or song playback.
During a lesson.
While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory.
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 93
Using USB Flash Memory
Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal
This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to
handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.
Compatible USB devices
USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive)
The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-
cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee
operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-
chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please
visit the following web page:
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
Connecting USB device
When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE
terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is
appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direc-
tion.
Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,
you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with
the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is
that of USB 1.1.
Using USB Storage Devices
By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you
can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as
well as read data from the connected device.
The number of USB storage device to be used
Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the
USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Formatting USB storage media
When a USB storage device is connected or media is
inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format
the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page
94).
To protect your data (write-protect)
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,
apply the write-protect provided with each storage device
or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,
make sure to disable write-protect.
Connecting/removing USB storage device
Before removing the media from the device, make sure that
the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save
and Delete operations).
•For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.
NOTE
Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse can-
not be used.
NOTE
Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instru-
ment, they cannot be used for saving data.
NOTE
The format operation overwrites any previously existing
data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not
contain important data.
CAUTION
•Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage
device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often.
Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument
“freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing
data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format opera-
tions) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after
the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT
remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the
power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on
either or both devices.
CAUTION
94 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Using USB Flash Memory
New USB flash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument.
1
After connecting the USB flash memory
to be formatted to the instrument’s USB
TO DEVICE terminal, check that the
icon is showing in the MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-
ton.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Format item.
The display prompts you for confirmation.
4
Press the [EXECUTE] button and the
display prompts you for confirmation.
You can press the [-] button at this point to can-
cel the operation.
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the format operation
will begin.
6
A message will appear on the display to
inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Formatting USB Flash Memory
If you format a USB flash memory that already contains data, all of
the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data
when using the format function.
CAUTION
f
r
Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display
the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the
power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate
message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-
cute the operation.
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 95
Using USB Flash Memory
Three types of data are saved to one “User File” by this operation: user song, style file, and registration mem-
ory data. When you save a user song the style file and registration memory are also saved automatically.
1
Make sure that a properly formatted
USB flash memory has been properly
connected to the instrument’s USB TO
DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is
showing in the MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to locate the User File Save item.
A default file name will automatically be cre-
ated.
4
Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor
will appear below the first character in
the file name.
5
Change the file name as necessary.
The [-] button moves the cursor to the left,
and the [0] button moves it to the right.
• Use the dial to select a character for the cur-
rent cursor location.
• The [+] button deletes the character at the
cursor location.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-
play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the save operation at this point
by pressing the [-] button.
7
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the save operation
will begin.
The user song will be stored to the USER FILE
folder in the USB flash memory.
8
A message will appear on the display to
inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Saving Data
To Overwrite an Existing File
If you want to overwrite a file that already exists
on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the
[+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip
ahead to step 6.
f
r
Up to 100 user files can be saved to a single USB flash memory.
If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate
message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-
cute the operation.
If there is not enough capacity left on the USB flash memory to save
the data an appropriate message will appear on the display and you
will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted files from the USB
flash memory to make more memory available (page 98), or use a
different USB flash memory.
Refer to the “Messages” list on page 116 for other possible errors
that might prevent you from completing the operation.
NOTE
Cursor
Cursor right
Delete characterCursor left The dial selects
characters
Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confir-
mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-]
to cancel.
The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will
depend on the condition of the USB flash memory.
NOTE
96 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Using USB Flash Memory
This operation converts a user song (song numbers 031–035) to SMF Format 0 and saves the file to USB
flash memory.
1
Make sure that a properly formatted
USB flash memory has been properly
connected to the instrument’s USB TO
DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is
showing in the MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-
ton.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to locate the SMF Save item.
The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will
be highlighted.
4
Select the source user song.
You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simulta-
neously to select the first user song.
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
The DESTINATION SONG will be high-
lighted, and a default name will appear for the
converted song file.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
A cursor will appear below the first character in
the file name.
7
Change the file name as necessary.
Refer to “Saving Data” on page 95 for filename
entry.
8
Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-
play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the save operation at this point
by pressing the [-] button.
9
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the save operation
will begin.
The user song will be stored to the USER FILE
folder in the USB flash memory.
10
A message will appear on the display
to inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Convert a User Song to SMF Format and Save
What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?
The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the
most common and widely compatible sequence
formats used for storing sequence data. There are
two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large
number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF
Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI
sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.
f
r
The source user song name.
To Overwrite an Existing File
If you want to overwrite a file that already exists
on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the
[+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip
ahead to step 7.
The name of the file to
be saved
Cursor
Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confir-
mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-]
to cancel.
The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will
depend on the condition of the USB flash memory.
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 97
Using USB Flash Memory
User files, style files, and styles residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded into the instrument. The
style file will be loaded into style number 161. If the required style file has already been transferred to the
instrument from a computer using the Musicsoft Downloader application, start from step 2, below. Refer to
“Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer” on page 102 for details on transferring style files.
1
With the USB flash memory containing
the file you want to load connected to
the USB TO DEVICE connector, check
that the File Control icon is shown in
the MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-
ton.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to locate the Load item.
4
Use the dial to select the user file or
style file you want to load.
All user files in the USB flash memory will be
displayed first, followed by the style files.
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-
play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the load operation at this point
by pressing the [-] button.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the load operation
will begin.
7
A message will appear on the display to
inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Loading User Files and Style Files
If you load a User File user song (031–035), style file, and registra-
tion memory data will be overwritten by the newly loaded data. If
you only load a style file, only the style file will be overwritten.
Save important data to a USB flash memory before loading data
that will overwrite it.
CAUTION
f
r
Style files must be located in the root directory. Style files located
within folders will not be recognized.
NOTE
Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
98 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Using USB Flash Memory
This procedure deletes user file and SMF file from a USB flash memory.
1
Make sure that the USB flash memory
containing the file(s) you want to delete
has been properly connected to the
instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,
and that the icon is showing in the
MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-
ton.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to locate the Delete item.
4
Select the file you want to delete.
You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simulta-
neously to select the first song or user file on
the USB flash memory.
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-
play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the delete operation at this
point by pressing the [-] button.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the delete operation
will begin.
7
A message will appear on the display to
inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory
f
r
Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display
the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate
message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-
cute the operation.
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 99
Using USB Flash Memory
1
Make sure that the USB flash memory
containing the song or music database
you want to play has been properly con-
nected to the instrument’s USB TO
DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is
showing in the MAIN display.
2
Press the [SONG] button if a song file is
to be played, or the [MUSIC DATABASE]
button if a Music Database is to be
played. Files of the corresponding type
will be displayed.
3
Use the dial to select the file you want
to play: Song numbers 36 and higher, or
Music Database numbers 301 and
higher.
4
Play the selected file in the same way
the internal files are played: press the
[START/STOP] button, or play on the
keyboard.
Playing Data on a USB Flash Memory
In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a com-
puter or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB
flash memory’s root directory or a first-level/second-level folder in
the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside
a second-level folder cannot be selected and played by this instru-
ment.
USB flash memory (Root)
Song
File
Song
File
Song
File
Can be selected/played.
Cannot be selected/played.
Song
File
IMPORTANT
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
100 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Connections
q USB TO DEVICE terminal
This terminal allows connection to USB stor-
age devices. Refer to “Precautions when using
the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on
page 93.
w USB TO HOST terminal
This terminal allows direct connection to a per-
sonal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-
sonal Computer” on page 101 for more
information.
Connectors
wq
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 101
Connections
The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.
Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 102).
Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 104).
The connection procedure is as follows:
1
Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-
puter.
The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.
Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on
pages 109–111.
2
Connect the USB terminal of the computer to
the USB terminal on the instrument using an
AB type USB cable (USB cable sold sepa-
rately).
The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft
Downloader application that allows you to transfer
song files from your computer to the instrument’s
flash memory. For instructions about how to install
Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song
files, see pages 104, 111.
Precautions when using the USB TO HOST
terminal
When connecting the computer to the USB TO
HOST terminal, make sure to observe the follow-
ing points. Failing to do so risks freezing the com-
puter and corrupting or losing the data. If the
computer or the instrument freezes, restart the
application software or the computer OS, or turn
the power to the instrument off then on again.
Connecting a Personal Computer
USB cable
Instrument
Computer
Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.
Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal,
exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as sus-
pended, sleep, standby).
Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com-
puter to the USB TO HOST terminal.
•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument
on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO
HOST terminal.
Quit any open application software on the computer.
Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-
ment. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard
or play back a song, etc.)
While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should
wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when
turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when
alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.
CAUTION
102 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Connections
By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-
puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.
When the instrument is connected with computer,
it transmits/receives performance data.
MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
to select the item you want to change its
value.
3
Use the dial to select ON or OFF.
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer
USB cable
USB terminalUSB terminal
Instrument
Computer
Item Range/Settings Description
Local ON/OFF
Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal
tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when
local control is off.
External Clock ON/OFF
These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to
a clock signal from an external device (ON).
Keyboard Out ON/OFF
These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or
not (OFF).
Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.
Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.
If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely
may be caused by Local Control being set to off.
CAUTION
If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from
an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will
not start.
CAUTION
f
r
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 103
Connections
PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
A number of MIDI settings need to be made when
you want to transfer performance data between the
computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item
can conveniently make multiple settings for you in
one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,
PC2, and OFF.
This setting is not necessary when transferring
song or backup files between the computer and the
instrument.
* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-
book.
1
Press and hold the [DEMO] button for
longer than a second so that the PC
Mode item appears.
2
Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.
You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on
your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the
panel.
Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To use the remote control functions, simulta-
neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-
board (A-1 and A#-1) and press the appropriate
key (shown below).
PC1 PC2* OFF
Local OFF OFF ON
External Clock ON OFF OFF
Song Out OFF OFF OFF
Style Out OFF OFF OFF
Keyboard Out OFF ON ON
When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,
song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.
NOTE
•You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to
locate it (page 89).
f
r
NOTE
Remote Control of MIDI Devices
A-1
A#-1
C7: Fast forward
B6: Start
A6: Stop
G6: Rewind
F6: Top (move to the begin-
ning of the song)
E6: Metronome ON/OFF
Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2
mode.
NOTE
104 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Connections
This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a
sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup
data before the actual performance data.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY
[] and [ ]
buttons
to select the Initial Send item.
3
Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]
to cancel.
MIDI songs, styles, or Music Database files resid-
ing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM can be
transferred to the instrument. Backup file can also
be transferred from the instrument to the computer
and back.
In order to transfer files between your computer
and the instrument you will need to install the
Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-
MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM
on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-
ROM Installation Guide on page 107 for installa-
tion details.
With the Musicsoft
Downloader You Can.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Transfer files from the computer to the instru-
ment’s flash memory.
refer to the procedure described on
page 105.
The procedure for transferring songs included
on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-
puter to the instrument is given as an example.
Backup file can be transferred from the instru-
ment to a computer and back.
refer to the procedure described on
page 106.
Initial Send
f
r
Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument
Data that can be transferred from a computer
to this instrument.
• Data Capacity: 875KB
512 files total for the Song, Style and Music
Database.
• Data Format
Song: .mid SMF format 0/1
Style: .sty
Music Database: .mfd
Backup File: 08PG88.BUP
Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 105
Connections
Use Musicsoft Downloader
To Transfer Songs From the
Accessory CD-ROM To the
Instrument’s flash memory
● ● ● ● ●
1
Install the Musicsoft Downloader and
USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then
connect the computer and the instru-
ment (page 109).
2
Insert the included CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive.
A start window will appear automatically.
3
Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader
shortcut icon that is created on the
desktop.
This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader
application and the main window will appear.
4
Click the “Add File” button and the Add
File window will appear.
5
Click the button to the right of “Look in”
and select the CD-ROM drive from the
drop-down menu that appears. Double-
click the “SampleData” Folder on the
window. Select the file from the “Song-
Data” Folder you want to transfer to the
instrument, and click “Open”.
At this point you can select a Style or Music Data-
base file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer
it to the instrument in the same way as a song file.
6
A copy of the selected MIDI song file
will appear in the “List of files stored
temporarily” at the top of the window.
The memory medium will also be displayed at
the bottom of the window to specify the desti-
nation for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and
then “Flash memory”.
7
After selecting the file in the “List of
files stored temporarily”, click the
downward [Move] button and a confir-
mation message will appear. Click [OK]
and the song will be transferred from
the “List of files stored temporarily” to
the instrument’s memory.
If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.
NOTE
The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader
is running.
NOTE
q Click the CD-ROM drive
w Double-click “SampleData” Folder
“SongData” Folder, and click a
song file.
e Click “Open”
q Click “Electronic Musical Instruments”,
and then “Flash Memory”
Files transferred to a USB flash memory root directory or the instru-
ment’s flash memory using the Musicsoft Downloader—any location
outside the USER FILES folder on the USB flash memory device—
cannot be deleted via the instrument’s file control display. Use the
Musicsoft Downloader delete button to delete such files.
NOTE
106 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Connections
8
Close the window to end the Musicsoft
Downloader.
9
To playback a song stored in flash
memory, press the [SONG] button.
Use the dial to select the song you want
to play, then press the [START/STOP]
button to start playback.
Transfer a Backup file from
the instrument to a computer
● ● ●
You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer
“Backup file” containing backup data (page 63),
including the five User Songs stored on the instru-
ment, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musi-
cal Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader
display, and then “System Drive”, a file named
“08PG88.BUP” will appear in the lower right cor-
ner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is
the backup file. For details about how to transfer
backup files using the Musicsoft Downloader
application, refer to the Online help “Transferring
Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for
unprotected data)” in the application.
To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...
In order to use songs (only SMF format 0)
transferred from a computer for lessons it is
necessary to specify which channels are to be
played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.
1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song
(036–) residing in flash memory for which you
want to set the guide track.
2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to
select the R-Part or L-Part item.
4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to
play back as the specified right- or left-hand
part.
We recommend that you select channel 1 for the
right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.
End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from
your computer.
NOTE
Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only
will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the
memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-
appear completely when the power is turned on or off.
CAUTION
Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or
improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a
copy of all important data stored on your computer.
CAUTION
f
r
Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.
NOTE
The backup data, including the five User Songs’ is transmitted/
received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be over-
written every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when
transferring data.
CAUTION
Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so it will
not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.
CAUTION
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 107
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.
Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon
breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of
this manual before installing the application.)
Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden
without the written consent of the manufacturer.
•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and can-
not be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.
This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.).
Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.
Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be
announced separately.
The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different
from the screens which appear on your computer.
Data Types
This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 109 for software installation instructions.
Operating System (OS)
The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Important Notices about the CD-ROM
Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on any playback device other
than a computer. The resulting high-volume noise may cause hear-
ing damage or damage to the playback device.
CAUTION
108 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.
You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/
Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Please read the Software License Agreement on
page 137 before opening the CD-ROM package.
1
Check the system requirements to
make sure that the software will run on
your computer.
2
Insert the included CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive.
The start window should appear automatically.
3
Install the USB-MIDI driver to the com-
puter.
Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on
page 109 for installation and setup instructions.
4
Connect the instrument to the com-
puter.
The connection procedure is described on page
101.
5
Install the software.
Musicsoft Downloader:
See page 111.
6
Launch the software.
For further software operation refer to the online
help supplied with the software.
Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 112 when
you have trouble with installing the driver.
CD-ROM Contents
q
e
wr
Folder Name
Application / Data
Name
Contents
q
MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader
This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet
and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory.
w
DMN_ Digital Music Notebook
Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and online
service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your favorite songs.
You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions
with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook.
DMN_FlashDemo
Digital Music Notebook
Flash Demo
Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music
Notebook.
e
SongBook Song Book
Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as
well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs
1–11, 16, 20 and song 30 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11
are provided in this manual beginning on page 118.
r
USBdrv2k_
USB-MIDI Driver
(Windows 2000/XP)
This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer
via USB.
USBdrvVista_
USB-MIDI Driver
(Windows Vista/XP x64)
SampleData
SongData MIDI 70 songs
These songs, styles, or music database can be transferred to the instrument
and played or used with the instrument functions.
StyleData 5 style files
MDB 5 music database files
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 109
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
Installing the USB-MIDI Driver
● ● ● ●
In order to be able to communicate with and use
MIDI devices connected to your computer, the
appropriate driver software must be properly
installed on your computer.
The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software
and similar applications on your computer to trans-
mit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI
devices via a USB cable.
Windows 2000 installation page 110.
Windows XP installation page 110.
Windows Vista installation page 111.
System Requirements
Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display
Musicsoft Downloader
Windows 2000/
XP Home Edition/
XP Professional/Vista
*Only 32-bit is supported.
233 MHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
processor family
(500 MHz or higher is
recommended)
64 MB or more
(256 MB or more
is recommended)
at least 128 MB of
free space (at least
512 MB of free
space is
recommended)
800 x 600
HighColor
(16-bit)
USB Driver for Windows
2000/XP
Windows 2000/XP Home
Edition/XP Professional
166 MHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
processor family
32 MB or more
(64 MB or more is
recommended)
at least 3 MB of free
space
USB Driver for Windows
Vista/XP x64
Windows Vista/XP
Professional x64 Edition
800 MHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
processor family or Intel
®
64 compatible processor
512 MB or more
at least 3 MB of free
space
Digital Music Notebook
Windows XP Home/
Professional Edition,
Service Pack 1a (SP1a)
more/Windows Vista
*Only 32-bit is supported.
400 MHz or higher
processor clock speed
(Intel
®
Pentium
®
/
Celeron
®
Processor
family, or compatible
processor recommended)
128 MB or more
(256 MB or more
is recommended)
at least 150 MB of
free space
1024 x 768
HighColor
(16-bit)
Digital Music Notebook
(Requirements for
playing content with
video included.)
Windows 2000/XP Home
Edition/XP Professional/
Vista
*Only 32-bit is supported.
1 GHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
Processor family (1.4 GHz
or more is recommended)
256 MB or more
Software Installation
Uninstall (Removing the Software)
Installed software can be removed from your
computer as follows:
From the Windows Start menu select Start
Settings Control panel Add or Remove
Applications Install and Uninstall. Select the
item you want to remove and click [Add or
Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to
remove the selected software.
The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on
the OS version you are using.
NOTE
Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you
will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is
displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My
Computer” folder. The root directory of the CD-
ROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively.
Driver
USB
Cable
MIDI device
Computer
Sequence
software
110 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
Installing the driver in Windows 2000
1
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log on to Windows 2000.
2
Select [My Computer] [Control Panel]
[System] [Hardware] [Driver Sign-
ing] [File Signature Verification], and
check the radio button to the left of
“Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file
signature” and click [OK].
3
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive.
A start window will appear automatically.
4
First, make sure the POWER switch on the
MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB
cable to connect the MIDI device to the
computer. After making the connections,
turn on the power of the MIDI device.
The system automatically launches the
Found New Hardware Wizard. Click [Next].
(Some computers may take a while to dis-
play the Wizard window.)
Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-
tion of the Owner’s Manual.
5
Select the radio button for “Search for a
suitable driver for my device [recom-
mended]”, then click [Next].
6
Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box,
deselect all other check boxes, then click
[Next].
7
Deselect the “Install one of the other driv-
ers”, then click [Next].
8
When the installation is complete, the
Wizard displays “Completing the Found
New Hardware Wizard”.
Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a
while to display the Wizard window.)
9
Restart the computer.
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.
Installing the driver in Windows XP
1
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log on to Windows XP.
2
Select [Start] [Control Panel]. If the
control panel appears as “Pick a cate-
gory”, click “Switch to Classic View” in
the upper left of the window.
All control panels and icons will be displayed.
3
Go to [System] [Hardware] [Driver
Signing Options] and check the radio but-
ton to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK].
4
Click the [OK] button to close System
Properties, and then click “X” in the upper
right of the window to close the Control
Panel.
5
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive.
A start window will appear automatically.
6
First, make sure the POWER switch on
the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a
USB cable to connect the MIDI device to
the computer. After making the connec-
tions, turn on the power of the MIDI
device. The system launches the Found
New Hardware Wizard automatically.
Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-
tion of the Owner’s Manual. If the system dis-
plays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right
corner, wait until Wizard window is displayed.
(Some computers may take a while to display the
window.)
If the Wizard window prompts you to specify
whether or not to connect to Windows Update,
select the radio button for “No, not this time”,
then click [Next].
7
Select the radio button for “Install the
software automatically (recommended)”,
then click [Next].
8
When the installation is complete, the
Wizard displays “Completing the Found
New Hardware Wizard”.
Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a
while to display the Wizard window.)
9
Restart the computer.
If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in
the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard win-
dow is displayed. (Some computers may take a
while to display the Wizard window.)
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.
If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during
detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g.,
D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation.
NOTE
If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to
install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes].
NOTE
If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Win-
dows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click
[Continue Anyway].
NOTE
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 111
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
10
When using Windows XP Professional
x64 Edition, the Support Module must
be installed.
After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the
connected USB devices, select “My Computer”
from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon
and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Select
“USBdrvVista_” “XPx64SupportModule”
“Setup.exe” and launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the on-
screen directions.
Installing the driver in Windows Vista
1
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log on to Windows Vista.
2
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive. A start window will appear
automatically.
3
First, make sure the POWER switch on
the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a
USB cable to connect the MIDI device to
the computer. After making the connec-
tions, turn on the power of the MIDI
device. The system automatically
launches the “Found New Hardware” win-
dow. Click “Locate and install driver soft-
ware (recommended)”.
Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-
tion of the Owner’s Manual. (Some computers
may take a while to display the window.).
4
If a message allowing Windows to search
online for driver software appears, click
“Don’t search online.
5
If a message prompting you to insert the
disk that came with your device appears,
click [Next].
The system starts the installation.
6
When the installation is complete, the
system displays the message “The soft-
ware for this device has been success-
fully installed. Click [Close].
(Some computers may take a while to display the
window.)
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.
Installing the Musicsoft
Downloader and Digital
Music Notebook Applications
● ● ●
1
Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your
computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start win-
dow will appear automatically showing
software applications.
2
Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital
Music Notebook].
3
Click the [install] button and follow the
on-screen instructions to install the soft-
ware.
For Digital Music Notebook operating instruc-
tions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music
Notebook application and click “Help”.
For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions
see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft
Downloader application and click “Help”.
*You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft
Downloader at the following Internet URL.
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Pro-
fessional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer.
NOTE
Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary,
even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USB-
MIDI driver.
NOTE
If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].
NOTE
If the “Windows Security” window appears, confirm this software is
authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install].
NOTE
•You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order
to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows
2000, XP or Vista.
•You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order
to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows,
XP or Vista.
IMPORTANT
When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Inter-
net Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer.
IMPORTANT
Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Note-
book content. Credit card processing may not be possible for
some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make
sure that your credit card can be used.
IMPORTANT
Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS
SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to
when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at
the end of this manual before using the application.
NOTE
If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your
“My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and
select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and
proceed to step 2, below.
NOTE
Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between
this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application
can be used.
IMPORTANT
112 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
Troubleshooting
Is the USB cable connected correctly?
Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the
USB cable, then connect it again.
Is the USB function enabled on your com-
puter?
When you connect the instrument to the
computer for the first time, if the “Add New
Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB
function on the computer may be disabled.
Perform the following steps.
1 Select [Control Panel]* [System]
[Hardware] [Device Manager] (for Win-
dows 2000/XP, or select [Control Panel]
[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista).
* Classic View only in Windows XP.
2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear
at “Universal serial bus controller” or
“USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x”
mark, the USB controller is disabled.
Is any unknown device registered?
If driver installation fails, the instrument will be
marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will
not be able to install the driver. Delete the
“Unknown device” by following the steps below.
1 Select [Control Panel]* [System]
[Hardware] [Device Manager] (for Win-
dows 2000/XP, or select [Control Panel]
[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista.)
* Classic View only in Windows XP.
2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu
“View devices by type”.
3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it
to extend the tree to look for “Unknown
device”. If one appears, select it and click
the [Remove] button.
4 Remove the USB cable from the instru-
ment, and make the connection again.
5 Install the driver again.
Windows 2000 users..... see page 110
Windows XP users........ see page 110
Windows Vista users .... see page 111
Did you install the driver? (page 109)
Is the USB cable connected correctly?
•Are the volume settings of the instrument,
playback device, and application program set
to the appropriate levels?
•Have you selected an appropriate port in the
sequence software?
•Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver?
The latest driver can be downloaded from the
following web site.
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
Does your computer satisfy the system
requirements?
Is any other application or device driver run-
ning?
Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI
application is running.
You may not be able to suspend/resume
normally, depending on the particular
environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even
so, simply disconnecting and connecting the
USB cable will allow you to use the instrument
functions again.
[Windows 2000/XP/Vista]
1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log on Windows.
Close all applications and windows that are
open.
2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive.
3 Select “My Computer” from the Start
menu.
4 Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select
“Open” from the pop-up menu.
5
Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_”
folder “uninstall” folder “uninstall.exe”
file and launch “uninstall.exe. file.
Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall
the driver.
The driver cannot be installed.
When controlling the instrument from your
computer via USB, the instrument does not
operate correctly or no sound is heard.
Playback response is delayed.
Cannot suspend or resume the com-
puter correctly.
How can I remove the driver?
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 113
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
6 A message asking you to restart your
computer in order to complete the
uninstall procedure will appear.
Driver removal will be complete when you
have restarted your computer.
When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from
“USBdrvVista_” folder.
NOTE
If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].
NOTE
114 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
For the Instrument
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical
power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may pro-
duce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it
further away from the instrument.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is
played or when a song or style is being played
back.
Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on
the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack,
no sound is output.
Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 102.)
Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard,
etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is
showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard
does not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 84), the keys in the right
hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type.
The style or song does not play back when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;
refer to “External Clock” on page 102.
The style does not sound properly.
Make sure that the Style Volume (page 90) is set to an appropriate
level.
Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are play-
ing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 79).
Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing
press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.
No rhythm accompaniment plays when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting
style number 131 or a style between 143 and 160
(Pianist).
This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143–
160 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other
parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment
range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on.
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound
seems to be cut off.
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the
Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing
back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “sto-
len”) from the accompaniment or song.
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the
opposite effect. For example, pressing the foot-
switch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains
the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the foot-
switch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning
on the power.
The sound of the voice changes from note to note.
This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple
recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the key-
board; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different
from note to note.
The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or
there are Japanese characters in the display mes-
sages.
Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to
English. (See page 16)
Appendix
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 115
Troubleshooting
The appropriate display does not appear when the
[SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or
[VOICE] button is pressed.
Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return
to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons.
The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is
played.
Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.
The ACMP indicator does not appear when the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when
you are going to use any style-related function.
There is no harmony sound.
The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their
type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are
played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is
played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether
style playback is on or off. For types 06–12 you need to play two
notes at the same time.
The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper
area of the MAIN display and the USB device
does not respond.
Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of
the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the
USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
116 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Messages
LCD Message Comment
Access error!
Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash
memory.
All Memory Clearing...
Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power
off during data transmission.
Are you sure? Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not.
Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory.
Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled.
Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs.
Com Mode
Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected
to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played
back.
Completed
Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmis-
sion.
Copy File Displayed while copying a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.
Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application.
Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data.
Delete File Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.
Delete OK ? Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not.
Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader.
Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged.
End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed.
Error! Displayed when writing has failed.
“File information area is not large enough.
Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total
number of files have become too many.
File is not found. Indicates there is no file.
“File too large. Loading is impossible.
Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too
large.
Flash Clearing...
Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal
flash memory.
Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not.
Formatting... Displayed while formatting.
Load OK ? Confirms whether loading is executed or not.
Loading... Displayed while loading data.
Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted.
Media capacity is full.
Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory
becomes full.
Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording.
“MIDI receive buffer overflow.
Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to
proceed.
Move File Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.
“Now Writing...
(Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise
the data may be damaged.)”
Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while
writing. Doing so may result in data loss.
OverCurrent
Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the
overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO
DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 117
Messages
Overwrite ? Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not.
Please Wait...
Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying
scores and lyrics.
Rename File Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader.
Save OK ? Confirms whether saving is executed or not.
Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist.
Saving...
Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while
saving. Doing so may result in data loss.
Send OK? Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not.
Sending... Displayed while transmitting data.
“Since the media is in use now, this
function is not available.
Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the
media is being accessed.
Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not.
“The limit of the media has been reached.
Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory
structure has become too complicated.
The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted.
“The media is write-protected.
Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-pro-
tected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use.
“The song data is too large to be
converted to notation.
Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too
large.
There are too many files.
Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files
exceeds the capacity.
“This function is not available now.
Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is
executing another job.
[nnn] “file name”
Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the
receiving block.
LCD Message Comment
Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages neces-
sary to be explained only.
NOTE
118 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Scores
This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece.
Hallelujah Chorus
Song No. 9 qq
qq
=123
(Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger)
Scores
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 119
Scores
120 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.
Ave Maria
Song No. 10 qq
qq
=61
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)
Repeatedly Play the Same Key.
P.A.T.
Your Turn.
Type =CHORD
Scores
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 121
Scores
122 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.
Nocturne op.9-2
Song No. 11 qq
qq
=108
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)
P.A.T.
Type =CHORD/FREE
Scores
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 123
124 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means
that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regard-
less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a
number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment
is used the total number of available notes for playing on the
keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the
Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is
exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most
recent notes have priority (last note priority).
Panel Voice List
NOTE
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
001 000 113 001 Live! Grand Piano
002 000 114 001 Live! Warm Grand Piano
003 000 112 001 Grand Piano
004 000 112 002 Bright Piano
005 000 112 007 Harpsichord
006 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano
007 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano
008 000 113 003 CP 80
E.PIANO
009 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano
010 000 118 005 Cool! Suitcase Electric Piano
011 000 119 005 Cool! Electric Piano
012 000 113 006 Hyper Tines
013 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano
014 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano
015 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano
016 000 114 008 E.Clavichord
017 000 112 008 Clavi
ORGAN
018 000 118 019 Cool! Organ
019 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ
020 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1
021 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2
022 000 112 019 Rock Organ
023 000 114 019 Purple Organ
024 000 112 018 Click Organ
025 000 116 017 Bright Organ
026 000 127 019 Theater Organ
027 000 121 020 16’+2’ Organ
028 000 120 020 16’+4’ Organ
029 000 113 020 Chapel Organ
030 000 112 020 Church Organ
031 000 112 021 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
032 000 112 022 Musette Accordion
033 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion
034 000 113 024 Bandoneon
035 000 113 023 Modern Harp
036 000 112 023 Harmonica
GUITAR
037 000 112 025 Classical Guitar
038 000 112 026 Folk Guitar
039 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar
040 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar
041 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar
042 000 112 028 Clean Guitar
043 000 113 027 Octave Guitar
044 000 112 029 Muted Guitar
045 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar
046 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar
BASS
047 000 112 034 Finger Bass
048 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass
049 000 112 035 Pick Bass
050 000 112 036 Fretless Bass
051 000 112 037 Slap Bass
052 000 112 039 Synth Bass
053 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass
054 000 113 040 Dance Bass
STRINGS
055 000 116 050 Live! Orchestra
056 000 112 049 String Ensemble
057 000 112 050 Chamber Strings
058 000 113 050 Slow Strings
059 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings
060 000 112 051 Synth Strings
061 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings
062 000 112 041 Violin
063 000 112 043 Cello
064 000 112 044 Contrabass
065 000 112 047 Harp
066 000 112 106 Banjo
067 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
068 000 112 053 Choir
069 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble
070 000 112 055 Air Choir
071 000 112 054 Vox Humana
SAXOPHONE
072 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax
073 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax
074 000 114 072 Sweet! Clarinet
075 000 118 067 Growl Sax
076 000 112 067 Tenor Sax
077 000 112 066 Alto Sax
078 000 112 065 Soprano Sax
079 000 112 068 Baritone Sax
080 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax
081 000 112 072 Clarinet
082 000 112 069 Oboe
083 000 112 070 English Horn
084 000 112 071 Bassoon
TRUMPET
085 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet
086 000 117 058 Sweet! Trombone
087 000 114 060 Sweet! Muted Trumpet
088 000 112 057 Trumpet
089 000 112 058 Trombone
090 000 113 058 Trombone Section
091 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet
092 000 112 061 French Horn
093 000 112 059 Tuba
BRASS
094 000 112 062 Brass Section
095 000 113 062 Big Band Brass
096 000 113 063 80’s Brass
097 000 119 062 Mellow Horns
098 000 114 063 Techno Brass
099 000 112 063 Synth Brass
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 125
XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List
FLUTE
100 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute
101 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute
102 000 112 074 Flute
103 000 112 073 Piccolo
104 000 112 076 Pan Flute
105 000 112 075 Recorder
106 000 112 080 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
107 000 112 081 Square Lead
108 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead
109 000 115 082 Analogon
110 000 119 082 Fargo
111 000 112 099 Star Dust
112 000 112 086 Voice Lead
113 000 112 101 Brightness
SYNTH PAD
114 000 118 089 SweetHeaven
115 000 112 092 Xenon Pad
116 000 112 095 Equinox
117 000 112 089 Fantasia
118 000 113 090 Dark Moon
119 000 113 101 Bell Pad
PERCUSSION
120 000 112 012 Vibraphone
121 000 112 013 Marimba
122 000 112 014 Xylophone
123 000 112 115 Steel Drums
124 000 112 009 Celesta
125 000 112 011 Music Box
126 000 112 015 Tubular Bells
127 000 112 048 Timpani
DRUM KITS
128 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1
129 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2
130 127 000 009 Room Kit
131 127 000 017 Rock Kit
132 127 000 025 Electronic Kit
133 127 000 026 Analog Kit
134 127 000 113 Dance Kit
135 127 000 033 Jazz Kit
136 127 000 041 Brush Kit
137 127 000 049 Symphony Kit
138 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1
139 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
XG PIANO
140 000 000 001 Grand Piano
141 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP
142 000 040 001 Piano Strings
143 000 041 001 Dream
144 000 000 002 Bright Piano
145 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP
146 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano
147 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP
148 000 032 003 Detuned CP80
149 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano
150 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP
151 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1
152 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP
153 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1
154 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2
155 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP
*156 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2
157 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano
158 000 000 007 Harpsichord
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
159 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP
160 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2
161 000 000 008 Clavi
162 000 001 008 Clavi KSP
XG CHROMATIC
163 000 000 009 Celesta
164 000 000 010 Glockenspiel
165 000 000 011 Music Box
166 000 064 011 Orgel
167 000 000 012 Vibraphone
168 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP
169 000 000 013 Marimba
170 000 001 013 Marimba KSP
171 000 064 013 Sine Marimba
172 000 097 013 Balimba
173 000 098 013 Log Drums
174 000 000 014 Xylophone
175 000 000 015 Tubular Bells
176 000 096 015 Church Bells
177 000 097 015 Carillon
178 000 000 016 Dulcimer
179 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2
180 000 096 016 Cimbalom
181 000 097 016 Santur
XG ORGAN
182 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ
183 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ
184 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1
185 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2
186 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1
187 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3
188 000 040 017 16+2’2/3
189 000 064 017 Organ Bass
190 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2
191 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ
192 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2
193 000 000 018 Percussive Organ
194 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ
195 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ
196 000 033 018 Light Organ
197 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2
198 000 000 019 Rock Organ
199 000 064 019 Rotary Organ
200 000 065 019 Slow Rotary
201 000 066 019 Fast Rotary
202 000 000 020 Church Organ
203 000 032 020 Church Organ 3
204 000 035 020 Church Organ 2
205 000 040 020 Notre Dame
206 000 064 020 Organ Flute
207 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute
208 000 000 021 Reed Organ
209 000 040 021 Puff Organ
210 000 000 022 Accordion
211 000 000 023 Harmonica
212 000 032 023 Harmonica 2
213 000 000 024 Tango Accordion
214 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2
XG GUITAR
215 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar
216 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
217 000 096 025 Ukulele
218 000 000 026 Steel Guitar
219 000 035 026 12-string Guitar
220 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar
221 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound
222 000 096 026 Mandolin
223 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar
224 000 032 027 Jazz Amp
225 000 000 028 Clean Guitar
226 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar
227 000 000 029 Muted Guitar
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
126 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
228 000 040 029 Funk Guitar
229 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar
230 000 045 029 Jazz Man
231 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar
232 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch
233 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar
234 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar
235 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2
236 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics
237 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback
238 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2
XG BASS
239 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass
240 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm
241 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
242 000 000 034 Finger Bass
243 000 018 034 Finger Dark
244 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar
245 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass
246 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2
247 000 065 034 Modulated Bass
248 000 000 035 Pick Bass
249 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass
250 000 000 036 Fretless Bass
251 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2
252 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3
253 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4
254 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1
255 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass
256 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2
257 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap
258 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1
259 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass
260 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2
261 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass
262 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass
263 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass
264 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark
*265 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass
266 000 041 040 DX Bass
XG STRINGS
267 000 000 041 Violin
268 000 008 041 Slow Violin
269 000 000 042 Viola
270 000 000 043 Cello
271 000 000 044 Contrabass
272 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings
273 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings
274 000 040 045 Suspense Strings
275 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings
276 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp
277 000 040 047 Yang Chin
278 000 000 048 Timpani
XG ENSEMBLE
279 000 000 049 Strings 1
280 000 003 049 Stereo Strings
281 000 008 049 Slow Strings
282 000 035 049 60’s Strings
283 000 040 049 Orchestra
284 000 041 049 Orchestra 2
285 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra
286 000 045 049 Velocity Strings
287 000 000 050 Strings 2
288 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings
289 000 008 050 Legato Strings
290 000 040 050 Warm Strings
291 000 041 050 Kingdom
292 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1
293 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2
294 000 000 053 Choir Aahs
295 000 003 053 Stereo Choir
296 000 032 053 Mellow Choir
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
297 000 040 053 Choir Strings
298 000 000 054 Voice Oohs
299 000 000 055 Synth Voice
300 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2
301 000 041 055 Choral
302 000 064 055 Analog Voice
303 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit
304 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2
305 000 064 056 Impact
XG BRASS
306 000 000 057 Trumpet
307 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet
308 000 000 058 Trombone
309 000 018 058 Trombone 2
310 000 000 059 Tuba
311 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet
312 000 000 061 French Horn
313 000 006 061 French Horn Solo
314 000 032 061 French Horn 2
315 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra
316 000 000 062 Brass Section
317 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section
318 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1
319 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass
320 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2
321 000 018 064 Soft Brass
322 000 041 064 Choir Brass
XG REED
323 000 000 065 Soprano Sax
324 000 000 066 Alto Sax
325 000 040 066 Sax Section
326 000 000 067 Tenor Sax
327 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax
328 000 000 068 Baritone Sax
329 000 000 069 Oboe
330 000 000 070 English Horn
331 000 000 071 Bassoon
332 000 000 072 Clarinet
XG PIPE
333 000 000 073 Piccolo
334 000 000 074 Flute
335 000 000 075 Recorder
336 000 000 076 Pan Flute
337 000 000 077 Blown Bottle
338 000 000 078 Shakuhachi
339 000 000 079 Whistle
340 000 000 080 Ocarina
XG SYNTH LEAD
341 000 000 081 Square Lead
342 000 006 081 Square Lead 2
343 000 008 081 LM Square
344 000 018 081 Hollow
345 000 019 081 Shroud
346 000 064 081 Mellow
347 000 065 081 Solo Sine
348 000 066 081 Sine Lead
349 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead
350 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2
351 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth
352 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth
353 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth
354 000 020 082 Big Lead
355 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog
356 000 000 083 Calliope Lead
357 000 065 083 Pure Lead
358 000 000 084 Chiff Lead
359 000 000 085 Charang Lead
360 000 064 085 Distorted Lead
361 000 000 086 Voice Lead
362 000 000 087 Fifths Lead
363 000 035 087 Big Five
364 000 000 088 Bass & Lead
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 127
The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.
365 000 016 088 Big & Low
366 000 064 088 Fat & Perky
367 000 065 088 Soft Whirl
XG SYNTH PAD
368 000 000 089 New Age Pad
369 000 064 089 Fantasy
370 000 000 090 Warm Pad
371 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad
372 000 000 092 Choir Pad
373 000 066 092 Itopia
374 000 000 093 Bowed Pad
375 000 000 094 Metallic Pad
376 000 000 095 Halo Pad
377 000 000 096 Sweep Pad
XG SYNTH EFFECTS
378 000 000 097 Rain
379 000 065 097 African Wind
380 000 066 097 Carib
381 000 000 098 Sound Track
382 000 027 098 Prologue
383 000 000 099 Crystal
384 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp
385 000 014 099 Popcorn
386 000 018 099 Tiny Bells
387 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel
388 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes
389 000 041 099 Clear Bells
390 000 042 099 Chorus Bells
391 000 065 099 Soft Crystal
392 000 070 099 Air Bells
393 000 071 099 Bell Harp
394 000 072 099 Gamelimba
395 000 000 100 Atmosphere
396 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere
397 000 019 100 Hollow Release
398 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano
399 000 064 100 Nylon Harp
400 000 065 100 Harp Vox
401 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad
402 000 000 101 Brightness
403 000 000 102 Goblins
404 000 064 102 Goblins Synth
405 000 065 102 Creeper
406 000 067 102 Ritual
407 000 068 102 To Heaven
408 000 070 102 Night
409 000 071 102 Glisten
410 000 096 102 Bell Choir
411 000 000 103 Echoes
412 000 000 104 Sci-Fi
XG WORLD
413 000 000 105 Sitar
414 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar
415 000 035 105 Sitar 2
416 000 097 105 Tamboura
417 000 000 106 Banjo
418 000 028 106 Muted Banjo
419 000 096 106 Rabab
420 000 097 106 Gopichant
421 000 098 106 Oud
422 000 000 107 Shamisen
423 000 000 108 Koto
424 000 096 108 Taisho-kin
425 000 097 108 Kanoon
426 000 000 109 Kalimba
427 000 000 110 Bagpipe
428 000 000 111 Fiddle
429 000 000 112 Shanai
XG PERCUSSIVE
430 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell
431 000 096 113 Bonang
432 000 097 113 Altair
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
433 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs
434 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
435 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal
436 000 000 114 Agogo
437 000 000 115 Steel Drums
438 000 097 115 Glass Percussion
439 000 098 115 Thai Bells
440 000 000 116 Woodblock
441 000 096 116 Castanets
442 000 000 117 Taiko Drum
443 000 096 117 Gran Cassa
444 000 000 118 Melodic Tom
445 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2
446 000 065 118 Real Tom
447 000 066 118 Rock Tom
448 000 000 119 Synth Drum
449 000 064 119 Analog Tom
450 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion
451 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal
XG SOUND EFFECTS
452 000 000 121 Fret Noise
453 000 000 122 Breath Noise
454 000 000 123 Seashore
455 000 000 124 Bird Tweet
456 000 000 125 Telephone Ring
457 000 000 126 Helicopter
458 000 000 127 Applause
459 000 000 128 Gunshot
460 064 000 001 Cutting Noise
461 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2
462 064 000 004 String Slap
463 064 000 017 Flute Key Click
464 064 000 033 Shower
465 064 000 034 Thunder
466 064 000 035 Wind
467 064 000 036 Stream
468 064 000 037 Bubble
469 064 000 038 Feed
470 064 000 049 Dog
471 064 000 050 Horse
472 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2
473 064 000 056 Maou
474 064 000 065 Phone Call
475 064 000 066 Door Squeak
476 064 000 067 Door Slam
477 064 000 068 Scratch Cut
478 064 000 069 Scratch Split
479 064 000 070 Wind Chime
480 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2
481 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition
482 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal
483 064 000 083 Car Passing
484 064 000 084 Car Crash
485 064 000 085 Siren
486 064 000 086 Train
487 064 000 087 Jet Plane
488 064 000 088 Starship
489 064 000 089 Burst
490 064 000 090 Roller Coaster
491 064 000 091 Submarine
492 064 000 097 Laugh
493 064 000 098 Scream
494 064 000 099 Punch
495 064 000 100 Heartbeat
496 064 000 101 Footsteps
497 064 000 113 Machine Gun
498 064 000 114 Laser Gun
499 064 000 115 Explosion
500 064 000 116 Firework
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
128 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Drum Kit List
Voice No. 128 129 130 131 132 133
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
assign
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy
Snare Snappy Electro
Snare Noisy 4
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot H Short
47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Tight Short Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short
48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed Analog
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Analog
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L
Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open
Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
•“ indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
Each percussion voice uses one note.
The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in
“128: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).
•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to
be played alternately with each other.)
C1
F1
B1
D1
C#1
D#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
F#1
E1
F0
B0
D0
C#0
D#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
F#0
E0
C2
F2
B2
D2
C#2
D#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
F#2
E2
C3
F3
B3
D3
C#3
D#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
F#3
E3
C4
F4
B4
D4
C#4
D#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
F#4
E4
C5
F5
B5
D5
C#5
D#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
F#5
E5
C6
F6
D6
C#6
D#6
G6
F#6
E6
Drum Kit List
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 129
Voice No. 128 134 135 136 137 138 139
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/001 126/000/002
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
assign
Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate
47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Techno L Gran Cassa
48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Small Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Wind Chime
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed Analog3
Telephone Ring 2
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open Analog 2
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Hand Cymbal
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
Hand Cymbal Short
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog
Siren
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
Hand Cymbal 2 Train
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Jet Plane
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
Hand Cymbal 2 Short
Starship
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Burst
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
Roller Coaster
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
Submarine
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2 Wind Punch
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
Stream Heartbeat
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
Bubble Footsteps
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 3
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun
97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun
98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion
99 D# 687D# 5 Firework
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou
C1
F1
B1
D1
C#1
D#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
F#1
E1
F0
B0
D0
C#0
D#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
F#0
E0
C2
F2
B2
D2
C#2
D#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
F#2
E2
C3
F3
B3
D3
C#3
D#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
F#3
E3
C4
F4
B4
D4
C#4
D#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
F#4
E4
C5
F5
B5
D5
C#5
D#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
F#5
E5
C6
F6
D6
C#6
D#6
G6
F#6
E6
130 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Style List
Style No. Style Name
8BEAT
1 ChartPianoPop
2 BritPopRock
3 8BeatModern
4 Cool8Beat
5 Classic8Beat
6 60’sGuitarPop
7 8BeatAdria
8 60’s8Beat
9 BubblegumPop
10 BritPopSwing
11 OffBeat
12 60’sRock
13 HardRock
14 RockShuffle
15 8BeatRock
16BEAT
16 16Beat
17 PianoPopShufle
18 PopShuffle1
19 PopShuffle2
20 GuitarPop
21 16BeatUptempo
22 KoolShuffle
23 JazzRock
24 HipHopLight
BALLAD
25 ChartPianoBld
26 PopGtrBallad
27 80’sBallad
28 PianoBallad
29 LoveSong
30 6/8ModernEP
31 6/8SlowRock
32 6/8OrchBallad
33 OrganBallad
34 PopBallad
35 16BeatBallad1
36 16BeatBallad2
DANCE
37 ClubBeat
38 Electronica
39 FunkyHouse
40 MellowHipHop
41 EuroTrance
42 Ibiza
43 DreamDance
44 TechnoPolis
45 Clubdance
46 ClubLatin
47 Garage
48 UKPop
49 HipHopGroove
50 HipShuffle
51 HipHopPop
DISCO
52 70’sDisco1
53 70’sDisco2
54 LatinDisco
55 DiscoPhilly
56 SaturdayNight
57 DiscoChocolate
58 DiscoHands
SWING&JAZZ
59 TradJazzPiano1
60 TradJazzPiano2
61 PianoBarBlues
62 BigBandFast
63 BigBandMedium
64 BigBandBallad
65 BigBandShuffle
66 JazzClub
67 Swing1
68 Swing2
69 OrchestraSwing
70 Five/Four
71 JazzBallad
72 Dixieland
73 Ragtime
74 AfroCuban
75 Charleston
R&B
76 Soul
77 DetroitPop1
78 60’sRock&Roll
79 6/8Soul
80 CrocoTwist
81 Rock&Roll
82 DetroitPop2
83 BoogieWoogie
84 ComboBoogie
85 6/8Blues
COUNTRY
86 70’sCountry
87 Country8Beat
88 CountryPop
89 CountrySwing
90 CountryBallad
91 Country2/4
92 CowboyBoogie
93 CountryShuffle
94 Bluegrass
LATIN
95 BrazilianSamba
96 BossaNova
97 PopBossa
98 Tijuana
99 DiscoLatin
100 Mambo
101 Salsa
102 Beguine
103 GuitarRumba
104 RumbaFlamenco
105 RumbaIsland
106 Reggae
BALLROOM
107 VienneseWaltz
108 EnglishWaltz
109 Slowfox
110 Foxtrot
111 Quickstep
112 Tango
113 Pasodoble
114 Samba
115 ChaChaCha
116 Rumba
Style No. Style Name
117 Jive
TRADITIONAL
118 USMarch
119 6/8March
120 GermanMarch
121 PolkaPop
122 OberPolka
123 Tarantella
124 Showtune
125 ChristmasSwing
126 ChristmasWaltz
127 ScottishReel
128 Hawaiian
WALTZ
129 ItalianWaltz
130 MariachiWaltz
131 GuitarSerenade
132 SwingWaltz
133 JazzWaltz1
134 JazzWaltz2
135 CountryWaltz
136 OberWaltzer
137 Musette
CHILDREN
138 Learning2/4
139 Learning4/4
140 Learning6/8
141 Fun 3/4
142 Fun 4/4
PIANIST
143 Stride
144 PianoBlues1
145 PianoBlues2
146 PianoRag
147 PianoRock&Roll
148 PianoBoogie
149 PianoJazzWaltz
150 PianoJazzBld
151 Arpeggio
152 Musical
153 Habanera
154 SlowRock
155 8BtPianoBallad
156 PianoMarch
157 6/8PianoMarch
158 PianoWaltz
159 PianoBeguine
160 PianoSwing
Style No. Style Name
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 131
Music Database List
MDB No. MDB Name
ALL TIME HITS
1 Jude Hey
2 New UK
3 MyLoving
4 All OK
5 Buttercp
6 JustCall
7 CheepChp
8 Daddy's
9 Dance?
10 GetBack
11 GtrWheel
12 HighTide
13 IWasBorn
14 Sailing
15 BluJeans
16 Holiday
17 Imagine
18 LoveMe
19 LetItBld
20 LdyMdona
21 YelowSub
22 Marriage
23 MovinOut
24 My Shell
25 NowNever
26 DoLoveMe
27 TcktRide
28 SeeClear
29 Masachus
30 Hard Day
31 USA Pie
32 Norway
33 YesterBd
MODERN POP
34 Watches
35 SoundMPH
36 Hold Us
37 Unfound
38 NeedSome
39 PrtTmLvr
40 MoonShdw
41 NikitSng
42 Sure of
43 Off Day
44 Tell Her
45 GirlsMne
46 NeedLove
POP CLASSICS
47 Standing
48 RainLaff
49 Sunshine
50 ForNamdo
51 ThankFor
52 ManPiano
53 CoinLane
54 LovesYou
55 Tmbourin
56 Alone
57 GldField
58 Raindrop
59 SultanSw
60 Life'sWk
61 TopWorld
62 WatchGrl
POP BALLAD
63 WnderLnd
64 CanIStop
65 EvryTime
66 IvoryAnd
67 TheWorld
68 LovWoman
69 Dolannes
70 Madigan
71 Paradise
72 Whisper
BALLAD
73 AllOdds
74 AtonalFl
75 Hero
76 Woman
77 RunToYou
78 LoveOfAl
79 CndleWnd
80 Cavatina
81 Cherish
82 ToLoveMe
83 YouKnow
84 Evrythng
85 EyesOfBl
86 Hello
87 BeThere
88 FlyAway
89 LoveYou
90 NeverLet
91 JustOnce
92 IfYouGo
93 SavingAl
94 InTheDrk
95 LovePwr
96 Vision
97 Beautifl
98 AllAlone
99 Opposite
100 BeHonest
101 SayYou
102 SayNthng
103 Stranger
104 OneDay
105 TheBayou
106 ThisSong
107 Distance
108 ThisWay
109 LoveGone
110 Inspirng
111 TrueColr
ROCK & ROLL
112 ShakenUp
113 Beethovn
114 HurryLov
115 BeCruel
116 Jumping
117 Countdwn
118 SuePeggy
119 Champion
120 Jailhous
121 BlueShoe
122 Rockin24
MDB No. MDB Name
123 Shouting
124 Rock&Rll
125 HonkyTnk
OLDIES
126 Daydream
127 Sumertme
128 Diana's
129 Uptown
130 Apache
131 IGotIt
132 Tonight
133 MyPillow
134 NoRain
135 FInalDance
136 SlpnLion
137 Ghetto
138 LipsLcky
139 PrettyWm
140 TikiGtr
141 TurnThre
142 Sherry
DANCE & DISCO
143 Babylon
144 Goodbye
145 Catch22
146 DISCO
147 Survival
148 TheNavy
149 DontHide
150 Celebrat
151 LondonRU
152 10,2 Sun
153 ShakeYou
154 Believe
155 BoySumer
156 I'mSexy
157 StuffHot
SWING & JAZZ
158 Patrol
159 Charles
160 GiveLove
161 Rhythm
162 LOVE
163 LeroyBad
164 Caraban
165 Misbehav
166 Safari
167 Smiling
168 SoWhatIs
169 TimeGone
170 TasteHny
171 Sandman
172 Tunisian
173 TwoFoot
174 MyBaby
R&B
175 AsPlayed
176 BabyGrov
177 Highwy66
178 SweetCHI
179 JustU&Me
180 ManLoves
181 OurLove
182 Wish I
MDB No. MDB Name
COUNTRY
183 OnTheRd
184 Breathe
185 InMyMind
186 ContryHw
187 GreenGrs
188 EverNeed
189 Lonesone
190 Lucille
191 HomeRng
192 Tennesse
LATIN
193 Bananabt
194 DanceMng
195 DntWorry
196 Jamaica
197 FleaSpa
198 I'mPola
199 MamboJm
200 OneNote
201 PasoCani
202 SayNoMor
203 Beguine
204 Tijuana
205 Picture
ENTERTAINMENT
206 OnTheHil
207 Barnacle
208 Califrag
209 DadClock
210 DanceLd
211 DnceFire
212 BigCntry
213 Cabaret
214 OdeToJoy
215 Mi-Re-Do
216 MyPrince
217 Necesary
218 NoBuiz
219 NoisyOld
220 Sleigh
221 RockBasy
222 Magnifiq
223 Magnfcnt
224 SilentNt
225 Nabucco
226 Standing
227 SummerPl
228 Christms
229 Favorite
230 Tubbie
231 Turkish
232 12OClock
WALTZ & TRADITIONAL
233 Blk&Whte
234 CanCan
235 Charmain
236 Musicbox
237 Clementn
238 Doodah!
239 Dreamer
240 EnterRag
241 Birthday
242 MaryLamb
MDB No. MDB Name
243 Donald's
244 MoonWlz
245 MoulinHt
246 Sunshine
247 PieceOf
248 GreenSlv
249 TakeFour
250 TexRose
251 ThePolka
252 Scarboro
253 Edelweis
254 AroundWd
255 Whatever
256 Yankee's
WORLD
257 Hawaii
258 D'amor
259 ElCondor
260 GoodbyRm
261 ILandOn
262 ItalyBel
263 Cucarumb
264 Puntuali
265 Cielito
266 ItalySun
267 SantaLuc
268 Trumpetr
269 VanMass
PIANIST
270 ItalySun
271 BeGood
272 Chaie's
273 Flower
274 Frenetic
275 Highwy66
276 Leaves
277 Miload
278 Cabaret
279 Wonderfl
280 Submarin
281 Mi-Re-Do
282 MoreRhum
283 NoBuiz
284 BeatifulSn
285 OhBlah
286 Charades
287 Sally's
288 Nabucco
289 Spanish
290 SunnyStr
291 MistyFln
292 LdnBridg
293 GrndClck
294 Importnc
295 Snowman
296 Favorite
297 SugerSpn
298 Washngtn
299 ThisWay
300 ZipperD
MDB No. MDB Name
132 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM
The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data.
File Name Song Name Composer
001Nutcr.mid
Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” P.I. Tchaikovsky
002Orphe.mid
“Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture J. Offenbach
003Slavo.mid
Slavonic Dances op.72-2 A. Dvorák
004Prima.mid
La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) A. Vivaldi
005Medit.mid
Méditation (Thaïs) J. Massenet
006Guill.mid
Guillaume Tell G. Rossini
007Fruhl.mid
Frühlingslied F. Mendelssohn
008Ungar.mid
Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 J. Brahms
009Fruhl.mid
Frühlingsstimmen J. Strauss II
010Dolly.mid
Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening T.Oesten
011Cande.mid
La Candeur J.F.Burgmüller
012Arabe.mid
Arabesque J.F.Burgmüller
013Pasto.mid
Pastorale J.F.Burgmüller
014Petit.mid
Petite Réunion J.F.Burgmüller
015Innoc.mid
Innocence J.F.Burgmüller
016Progr.mid
Progrès J.F.Burgmüller
017Taren.mid
Tarentelle J.F.Burgmüller
018Cheva.mid
La Chevaleresque J.F.Burgmüller
019Etude.mid
Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” F.Chopin
020Marci.mid
Marcia alla Turca L.v. Beethoven
021Turki.mid
Turkish March W.A. Mozart
022Valse.mid
Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” F.Chopin
023Menue.mid
Menuett L. Boccherini
024Momen.mid
Moments Musicaux op.94-3 F. Schubert
025Enter.mid
The Entertainer S. Joplin
026Prelu.mid
Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) J.S. Bach
027Violl.mid
La Viollette L.Streabbog
028Angel.mid
Angels Serenade Traditional
029Saraf.mid
Krasnyj Sarafan Traditional
030Ameri.mid
America the Beautiful S.A. Ward
031Brown.mid
Little Brown Jug Traditional
032Lomon.mid
Loch Lomond Traditional
033Bonni.mid
My Bonnie Traditional
034Londo.mid
Londonderry Air Traditional
035Banjo.mid
Ring de Banjo S.C. Foster
036Vogle.mid
Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Traditional
037Lorel.mid
Die Lorelei F. Silcher
038Funic.mid
Funiculi Funicula L. Denza
039Turke.mid
Turkey in the Straw Traditional
040Campt.mid
Camptown Races S.C. Foster
041Jingl.mid
Jingle Bells J.S. Pierpont
042Muss.mid
Muss i denn F. Silcher
043Liebe.mid
Liebesträume Nr.3 F. Liszt
044Jesu.mid
Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring J.S. Bach
045Joy.mid
Ode to Joy L.v. Beethoven
046Pearl.mid
Pearl Fisher G. Bizet
047Gavot.mid
Gavotte F.J. Gossec
048Seren.mid
Serenade/Haydn F.J. Haydn
049Menue.mid
Menuett BWV. Anh.114 J.S. Bach
050Canon.mid
Canon in D J. Pachelbel
051Vogel.mid
Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die Zauberflöte” W.A. Mozart
052Piano.mid
Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” L.v. Beethoven
053Surpr.mid
The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 F.J. Haydn
054WildR.mid
To a Wild Rose E.A. MacDowell
055Chans.mid
Chanson du Toreador G. Bizet
056Babbi.mid
O Mio Babbino Caro G. Puccini
057RowRo.mid
Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) Traditional
058Smoky.mid
On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) Traditional
059WeWis.mid
We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Traditional
060ImMai.mid
Im Mai (DUET) Traditional
061Chris.mid
O Christmas Tree (DUET) Traditional
062MaryH.mid
Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Traditional
063TenLi.mid
Ten Little Indians (DUET) S. Winner
064PopGo.mid
Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Traditional
065Twink.mid
Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Traditional
066Close.mid
Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) J.J. Rousseau
067Cucko.mid
The Cuckoo (DUET) Traditional
068Augus.mid
O du lieber Augustin (DUET) Traditional
069Londo.mid
London Bridge (DUET) Traditional
070Three.mid
Three Blind Mice (DUET) Traditional
ˇ
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 133
Effect Type List
Harmony Types
Reverb Types
Chorus Types
No. Harmony Type Description
01 Duet
Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the sin-
gle-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing
songs that contain chord data.
02 Trio
03 Block
04 Country
05 Octave
06 Trill 1/4 note
Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in
time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompani-
ment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo set-
ting (page 32). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect
precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets,
1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets.
The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two
notes are held.
The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four).
The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played.
07 Trill 1/6 note
08 Trill 1/8 note
09 Trill 1/12 note
10 Trill 1/16 note
11 Trill 1/24 note
12 Trill 1/32 note
13 Tremolo 1/4 note
14 Tremolo 1/6 note
15 Tremolo 1/8 note
16 Tremolo 1/12 note
17 Tremolo 1/16 note
18 Tremolo 1/24 note
19 Tremolo 1/32 note
20 Echo 1/4 note
21 Echo 1/6 note
22 Echo 1/8 note
23 Echo 1/12 note
24 Echo 1/16 note
25 Echo 1/24 note
26 Echo 1/32 note
No. Reverb Type Description
01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.
04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.
06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.
08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.
10 Off No effect.
No. Chorus Type Description
01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.
05 Off No effect.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
134 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA [ Portable Grand ] Date:10-OCT-2007
Model DGX-530/YPG-535 MIDI Implementation Chart Version:1.0
Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Function...
Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16
Channel Changed x x
Default 3 3
Mode Messages x x
Altered ************** x
Note 0 - 127 0 - 127
Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127
Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127
Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x
After Key’s x x
Touch Ch’s x x
Pitch Bend o 0-24 semi o 0-24 semi
0,32 o o Bank Select
1,11,84 x *1 o
6,38 o o Data Entry
7,10 o o
Control 64 o o Sustain
71 x *1 o Harmonic Content
Change 72 o o Release Time
73 x *1 o Attack Time
74 x *1 o Brightness
91,93 o o Effect Depth
96-97 x *1 o RPN Inc,Dec
100-101 o o RPN LSB,MSB
MIDI Implementation Chart
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 135
Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127
Change : True # **************
System Exclusive o o
: Song Pos. x x
Common : Song Sel. x x
: Tune x x
System : Clock o o
Real Time: Commands o o
Aux :All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)
:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)
:Local ON/OFF x o(122)
:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)
Mes- :Active Sense o o
sages:Reset x x
*1 Refer to #2 on page 136.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No
136 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
NOTE:
1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions
as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming
data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. How-
ever, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel
voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.
MIDI Master Tuning
System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type
and Chorus Type.
2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be trans-
mitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be trans-
mitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the
Harmony effect.
3 Exclusive
<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H
This message automatically restores all default settings for
the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.
<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H
This message allows the volume of all channels to be
changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive).
The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values
for “ll” are ignored.)
<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H,
mm, ll, cc, F7H
This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of
all channels.
The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning.
The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respec-
tively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”.
<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH,
llH, F7H
mm : Reverb Type MSB
ll : Reverb Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 136) for details.
<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH,
llH, F7H
mm : Chorus Type MSB
ll : Chorus Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 136) for details.
4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is trans-
mitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is
transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH
(accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are rec-
ognized.
5 Local ON/OFF
<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F
<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00
Value for “n” is ignored.
Effect map
* When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest
to the specified value) is automatically set.
* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display.
REVERB
CHORUS
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20
000 No Effect
001 (01)Hall1 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3
002 Room (04)Room1 (05)Room2
003 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2
004 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2
005...127 No Effect
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20
000...063 No Effect
064 Thru
065 Chorus (02)Chorus2
066 Celeste (01)Chorus1
067 Flanger (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2
068...127 No Effect
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 137
ATTENTION
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREE-
MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE
ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT
IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND
YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).
BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING
TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE
USE THIS SOFTWARE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT
Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)
and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-
WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.
The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-
tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While
you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-
WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-
rights.
You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.
You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for
backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup
copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copy-
right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy
of the SOFTWARE.
You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-
WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads
and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.
2. RESTRICTIONS
You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or
otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method
whatsoever.
You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-
WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.
You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to
another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.
You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-
lates public policy.
You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without
permission by Yamaha Corporation.
Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained
by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which
you must observe.
Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-
mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.
Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-
ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public
without permission of the copyright owner.
The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be
removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission
of the copyright owner.
3. TERMINATION
This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFT-
WARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provi-
sions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate
automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termi-
nation, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accom-
panying written documents and all copies thereof.
4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA
As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible
media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-
rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days
from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire
liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media
if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days
with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-
aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your
sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”
and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER
PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DIS-
CLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,
YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN
THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-
MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO
EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-
SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-
ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-
WARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall
Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action
(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-
WARE.
7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be
attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data
accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide
by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFT-
WARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is
responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.
•Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-
WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
•Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
•Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,
without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,
expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-
use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
8. GENERAL
This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese
law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or proce-
dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a
court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unen-
forceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and
effect.
9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT
This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and
supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, writ-
ten or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or
revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a
fully authorized representative of Yamaha.
138 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT
By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which
will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product.
The Product is copyright © 1987-2007 Sibelius Software, a division of Avid Technology, Inc, and its licensors.
1. Definitions
In this License the following words and expressions have the
following meanings:
“License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if
permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in this
agreement.
“Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One
Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius
Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK
“Product”: the Software and the Documentation.
“Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki,
Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or files
supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the Sibelius
Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer.
“Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the
Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor.
2. License
2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable
license to use this Software in accordance with the
Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the
Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product
remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the
rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are
reserved.
2.2 You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the
Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make
or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part
of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form.
2.3 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,
(1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any
part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for
the purpose of error correction);
(2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the
whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or
incorporated into any other program, file or product, for any
purpose; or
(3) use the Software to create files in any format (other than
temporary files created and required by your computer’s
operating system or web browser), including without
limitation screen capture files, files generated from the
Software’s playback, graphics files and print files, for any
purpose, except for creating MIDI files (if permitted by the
Software) for private non-commercial use.
2.4 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,
decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the
Software in whole or in part for any purpose.
2.5 You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate,
convert, decode or reverse engineer any file capable of being
read by any copy or version of the Software or any data
transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in
whole or in part for any purpose.
2.6 The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any
right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or
any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity.
3. Copyright
3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and
in the components of the Product as between you and the
Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is protected
by copyright laws, national and international, and all other
applicable laws.
4. Disclaimer of Liability
4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed
hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all
warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or
implied, including without limitation any warranties that the
Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with the
Documentation, is merchantable, or is fit for any particular
purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any
liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including
without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data and
loss of profits, revenue or goodwill and any type of special,
indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in
connection with your installation and use of the Product.
5. Termination
5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your
destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to
terminate this License in the event of a material breach by you
of any condition of this License or of any of your
representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder.
Upon notification of such termination by the Licensor, you will
immediately delete the Software from your computer and
destroy the Documentation.
6. Miscellaneous
6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of
the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder
shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial
exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or
further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power
or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in
connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies
provided by law.
6.2 You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or
otherwise transfer the Product to any third party.
6.3 You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with
the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on
www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time.
6.4 This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a final
expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter
hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of
such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior
understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the
Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof.
6.5 (This section only applies if you are resident in the European
Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the
laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the
exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.
6.6 (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European
Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced in
accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of
California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in
any way related or connected to this License shall be brought
and maintained only in the United States District Court for the
Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San
Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of
such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding. Each
party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial by jury
in any suit, action or proceeding (including any counterclaim),
whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way related
or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof.
(License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007)
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 139
Specifications
Keyboards
88-key box type (A-1–C7), with Touch Response.
Display
320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit)
Setup
STANDBY/ON
MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX
LCD CONTRAST
Panel Controls
SONG, VOICE, STYLE, EASY SONG ARRANGER,
P.A.T. ON/OFF, LESSON L, LESSON R, LESSON START,
METRONOME ON/OFF, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO,
FUNCTION, MUSIC DATABASE, HARMONY ON/OFF,
DUAL ON/OFF, SPLIT ON/OFF, TEMPO/TAP, [0]–[9], [+],
[-], CATEGORY, Dial, REPEAT & LEARN (ACMP ON/OFF),
A-B REPEAT (INTRO/ENDING/rit.), PAUSE (SYNC START),
START/STOP, REW (MAIN/AUTO FILL), FF (SYNC STOP),
REGIST MEMORY ([MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2]),
SONG MEMORY (REC, [1]–[5], [A]), File Control [MENU],
File Control [EXECUTE], [EXIT], [LYRICS], [SCORE],
[CHORD FINGERING]
Realtime Control
Pitch Bend Wheel
Voice
127 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices
Polyphony: 32
DUAL
SPLIT
Style
160 Preset Styles + External files
Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START,
START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit.,
MAIN/AUTO FILL
Fingering: Multi Finger, Full Keyboard
Style Volume
Music Database
300 + External files
Education Feature
Dictionary
Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn
Registration Memory
•8 banks x 2 types
Function
VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume
OVERALL: Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitiv-
ity, Pitch Bend Range, Chord Fingering
MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level
DUAL VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level
SPLIT VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level
EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type,
Sustain
HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume
Performance assistant technology:
Performance assistant technology Type
PC: PC Mode
MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,
Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out
METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature
Denominator, Metronome Volume
SCORE: Quantize
LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade
UTILITY: Demo Cancel, Language
Effects
Reverb: 9 types
Chorus: 4 types
Harmony: 26 types
Song
30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs
(70)
Song Clear, Track Clear
Song Volume
Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE,
REW, FF, START/STOP
Performance assistant technology
Chord, Chord/Free, Melody, Chord/Melody
Recording
Song
User Song: 5 Songs
Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE
MIDI
Local On/Off • Initial Send • External Clock
Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out
Auxiliary jacks
PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB TO HOST,
USB TO DEVICE, SUSTAIN
Amplifier
6W + 6W
Speakers
12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2
Power Consumption
22W
Power Supply
Adaptor: PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha
Dimensions (W x D x H)
1,340 x 422 x 145 mm (52-3/4” x 16-5/8” x 5-3/4”)
with keyboard stand:
1,354 x 485 x 775 mm (53-1/3” x 19-1/8” x 30-1/2”)
Weight
11.0kg (24 lbs. 4 oz.)
with keyboard stand: 17.0kg (37 lbs. 8 oz.)
Supplied Accessories
Music Rest • Accessory CD-ROM
Keyboard Stand • Owner’s Manual • Footswitch FC5
AC Power adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha)
* May not be included depending on your particular area.
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for infor-
mation purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or
modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice.
Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in
every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Optional Accessories
Headphones: HPE-150
140 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual
+/– .................................................. 14, 65
........................................................ 66
0–9 .................................................. 14, 65
A-B REPEAT ................................. 14, 85
ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 14, 26
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] ........... 14, 65
Chord Fingering ............................. 14, 83
DC IN 12V ..................................... 12, 15
DEMO ............................................ 14, 33
Dial ................................................. 14, 65
DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 14, 18
EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 14, 56
EXECUTE ...................................... 14, 94
EXIT ............................................... 14, 66
FF ................................................... 14, 32
FILE CONTROL ........................... 14, 92
FUNCTION .................................... 14, 89
HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 14, 68
INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 14, 76
LCD CONTRAST .......................... 15, 67
LESSON L, R ................................. 14, 49
LESSON START ........................... 14, 48
LYRICS .......................................... 14, 36
MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 14, 76
MASTER VOLUME ..................... 13–14
MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 14, 87
MENU ............................................ 14, 92
METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 14, 22
MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 14, 55
P.A.T. ON/OFF ........................ 14, 38, 46
PAUSE ........................................... 14, 32
PC ....................................................... 103
PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 12, 15
PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 14, 71
PORTABLE GRAND .................... 14, 20
REC, 1–5, A ................................... 14, 58
REGIST MEMORY ....................... 14, 87
REPEAT & LEARN ...................... 14, 54
REW ............................................... 14, 32
SCORE ........................................... 14, 35
SONG ............................................. 14, 31
SONG MEMORY .......................... 14, 59
SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 14, 19
STANDBY/ON .............................. 13–14
START/STOP ................................ 14, 65
STYLE ............................... 14, 25–29, 76
SUSTAIN ....................................... 12, 15
SYNC START ......................... 14, 26, 77
SYNC STOP .................................. 14, 78
TEMPO/TAP ...................... 14, 22, 32, 72
USB TO DEVICE .................. 15, 92, 100
USB TO HOST ............................ 15, 100
VOICE ............................................ 14, 17
A
A-B Repeat ...........................................85
Accessories .............................................7
ACMP ...................................................26
Auto Accompaniment Range ................26
Auto-Accompaniment ..............26, 28, 30
B
Backup ..........................................63, 106
C
CD-ROM ............................................107
Chord ..................................28–30, 81–82
Chord Dictionary ..................................84
Chord Fingering ..............................30, 83
Chord root .............................................84
Chord type (Chord Dictionary) .............84
Chord type (performance
assistant technology) ...................37–38
Chord/Free type (performance
assistant technology) ...................37, 40
Chord/Melody type (performance
assistant technology) ...................37, 44
Chorus ...................................................70
Chorus Type .......................................133
Computer ............................101–102, 104
D
Default Setting ......................................89
Delete (File Control) .............................98
Delete (Song Track) ..............................62
Delete (User Song) ...............................61
Demo ....................................................33
Demo Cancel ........................................91
Display ............................................66–67
Double-Staff Score ...............................35
Drum Kit ...............................................21
Drum Kit List ......................................128
Dual Chorus Level ................................90
Dual Octave ..........................................90
Dual Pan ...............................................90
Dual Reverb Level ................................90
Dual Voice ............................................18
Dual Volume .........................................90
E
Easy Chords ..........................................30
Easy Song Arranger ..............................56
Effect Map ..........................................136
Effect Type List ..................................133
External Clock ..............................91, 102
External Song .......................................34
F
File Control .......................................... 92
File Name ............................................. 95
Flash Memory ...................................... 34
Foot Switch .......................................... 12
Format (File Control) ........................... 94
Function ................................... 66, 89–91
Function Display .................................. 66
G
Grade .................................................... 51
H
Harmony ............................................... 68
Harmony Type ................................... 133
Harmony Volume ................................. 91
Headphones .......................................... 12
I
Initial Send ......................................... 104
Initialization ......................................... 63
K
Keyboard Out ............................... 91, 102
Keyboard Stand Assembly ................... 10
L
Language .............................................. 16
Lesson .................................................. 48
Load ..................................................... 97
Local ............................................. 91, 102
L-Part ........................................... 91, 106
Lyric ..................................................... 36
M
Main Chorus Level ............................... 90
MAIN Display ...................................... 66
Main Octave ......................................... 90
Main Pan .............................................. 90
Main Reverb Level ............................... 90
Main Voice ........................................... 17
Main Volume ....................................... 90
Master EQ Type ............................. 74, 90
Measure ................................................ 67
Melody ........................................... 35, 47
Melody Score ....................................... 35
Melody type (performance
assistant technology) .................. 37, 42
Melody Voice ................................. 57, 86
Messages ............................................ 116
f
r
Index
Panel controls and terminals Alphabetical order
Index
DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 141
Metronome ........................................... 22
MIDI ................................................... 102
MIDI Data Format .............................. 136
MIDI Implementation Chart ............... 134
Music Database .................................... 55
Music Rest ............................................ 13
Mute ..................................................... 86
N
notation ................................................. 67
O
One Touch Setting ................................ 73
P
P.A.T. Type .................................... 37, 91
Panel Sustain .................................. 71, 90
PC Mode ............................................. 103
performance assistant technology ........ 37
Pitch Bend Range ................................. 90
Power Adaptor ..................................... 12
Preset Song ............................... 31, 33–34
Q
Quantize ............................................... 91
R
Recording ............................................. 58
Registration Memory ........................... 87
Remote control ................................... 103
Repeat ............................................. 54, 85
Reverb .................................................. 69
Reverb Type ....................................... 133
R-Part ........................................... 91, 106
S
Save (File Control) ............................... 95
Score ....................................... 35, 47, 118
Single-Staff Score ................................ 35
SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 96
SMF Save ............................................. 96
Software Licensing Agreement .......... 137
Song ...................................................... 31
Song Clear ............................................ 61
Song List .............................................. 33
Song Memory ................................. 58–59
Song Out ....................................... 91, 102
Song Volume ........................................ 85
Specifications ..................................... 139
Split Chorus Level ................................ 90
Split Octave ..........................................90
Split Pan ................................................90
Split Point .......................................19, 79
Split Reverb Level ................................90
Split Voice ............................................19
Split Volume .........................................90
Standard Chords ...................................30
Style ..........................................25, 28, 76
Style File .........................................83, 97
Style List .............................................130
Style Out .......................................91, 102
Style Volume ........................................80
Sustain (Footswitch) .............................12
Sustain (Panel) ................................71, 90
Synchro Start ..................................26, 77
Synchro Stop .........................................78
T
Tempo .............................................32, 72
TimeSignature
(Denominator, Numerator) ...............23
Touch Response ....................................72
Touch Sensitivity ..................................72
Track .....................................................58
Track Clear ...........................................62
Transfer .......................................102, 104
Transpose ..............................................75
Troubleshooting ..........................112, 114
Tuning ...................................................75
U
USB-MIDI Driver .......................110–111
User file ..........................................95, 97
User File Save .......................................95
User Song .......................................34, 58
V
Voice .....................................................17
Voice List ...........................................124
X
XF .....................................................6, 36
XGlite .....................................................6
LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON
PORTABLE KEYBOARDS
(NP, NPV, PSRE, PSREW, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES)
Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free
performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every
Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the
Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s
authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted
Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or
Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.
Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or
otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or
materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If
Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or
removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay
the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)
damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to
follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the
carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been
altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)
deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)
damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/
noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of
alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original
Owner and is not transferable.
In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted
Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact
Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local
authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer
has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website
at www.Yamaha.com
. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of
the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase
document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found
ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon
receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.
Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER
EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.
YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT
YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to
state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to
assume for it any other express warranty.
If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:
CUSTOMER SERVICE
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373
Telephone: 800-854-1569
www.yamaha.com
Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation of America.
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,
Canada
Tel: +1-416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: +1-714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José
Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,
D.F., C.P. 03900
Tel: +52-55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B
Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,
Brazil
Tel: +55-11-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,
Sucursal Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,
Madero Este-C1107CEK,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: +54-11-4119-7000
VENEZUELA
Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A.
AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza,
Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela
Tel: +58-212-943-1877
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,
P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, U.K.
Tel: +44-1908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen,
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: +41-44-3878080
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/
ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900
POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland
Tel: +48-22-880-08-88
BULGARIA
Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.
Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa
1528 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel: +359-2-978-20-25
MALTA
Olimpus Music Ltd.
Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta
Tel: +356-2133-2093
NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/
LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: +31-347-358040
FRANCE
Yam a ha M u si c E uro p e
7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,
77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France
Tel: +33-1-6461-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy
Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: +39-02-93577-1
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal
en España
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231
Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain
Tel: +34-91-639-88-88
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,
Greece
Tel: +30-210-6686260
SWEDEN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial
Scandinavia
JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: +46-31-89-34-00
DENMARK
Yamaha Music Denmark,
Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland
Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark
Tel: +45-44-92-49-00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Antaksentie 4
FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland
Tel: +358 (0)96185111
NORWAY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -
Norwegian Branch
Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway
Tel: +47-6716-7800
ICELAND
Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.
Sidumula 20
IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: +354-525-5050
CROATIA
Euro Unit D.O.O.
Slakovec 73
40305 Nedelisce
Tel: +38540829400
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.
Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,
Moscow, 121059, Russia
Tel: +7-495-626-5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
Yam a ha M u si c G ul f FZ E
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
TURKEY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi
Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz
Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey
Tel: +90-212-999-8010
CYPRUS
Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.
Nikis Ave 2k
1086 Nicosia
Tel: + 357-22-511080
Major Music Center
21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy
P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel: (392) 227 9213
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yam a h a M u si c G ul f FZ E
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: +86-400-051-7700
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: +852-2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Private Limited
Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A,
Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002,
Haryana, India
Tel: +91-124-485-3300
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: +62-21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,
Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea
Tel: +82-2-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: +60-3-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited
Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,
Singapore 530202, Singapore
Tel: +65-6740-9200
TAIWAN
Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.
2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.
New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: +886-2-7741-8888
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: +66-2215-2622
VIETNAM
Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited
15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach
Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,
Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
Tel: +84-8-3818-1122
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
http://asia.yamaha.com
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
VIC 3006, Australia
Tel: +61-3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: +64-9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
http://asia.yamaha.com
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
DMI15
Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan
(For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Manual Development Department
© 2016 Yamaha Corporation
WM36660 Published 02/2016 PO##*.*-**B0
Printed in China
Yamaha Global Site
http://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual Keyboard Stand Assembly For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions on page 10 of this manual. EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Model ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Purchase Date Serial No. Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) 2 PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : DGX-530/YPG-535 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) (2 wires) DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. Location • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. • Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. (3)-11 4 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 1/2 Connections Saving data • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saving and backing up your data The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the Registration Memory (page 87.) Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a computer. (pages 95, 106) Backing up the USB storage device/external media • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● Trademarks • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (3)-11 2/2 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 5 Copyright Notice The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for three (3) of the songs pre-installed in this electronic keyboard: Mona Lisa from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A. Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans Copyright © 1949 (Renewed 1976) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Composition Title : Against All Odds Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403 Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. Can’t Help Falling In Love from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore Copyright © 1961; Renewed 1989 Gladys Music (ASCAP) Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Panel Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). 6 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha DGX-530/YPG-535 Portable Grand! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Included Accessories The DGX-530/YPG-535 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • • • • • • Music rest Accessory CD-ROM Owner’s manual (this book) Keyboard stand Footswitch AC Power Adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features of the DGX-530/YPG-535 Graded Soft Touch keyboard Just as on an actual piano, the lower keys are heavy in touch and the higher keys are light, with soft touch of digital keyboard for beginners. ■ Performance assistant technology Page 37 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply by tapping one key. ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices All you need is one finger! Page 17 With the DGX-530/YPG-535, the instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 26 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. ■ Easy Performance with Music Notation Display When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear on the score display. * No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display function does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data. 8 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Page 35 Contents Copyright Notice ....................................................................... 6 Panel Logos ............................................................................. 6 Included Accessories ............................................................... 7 Special Features of the DGX-530/YPG-535............................. 8 Setting Up Basic Operation 64 Basic Operation ...................................................................... 64 The Displays ........................................................................... 66 MAIN Display Items ................................................................ 67 10 Keyboard Stand Assembly................................. 10 Power Requirements .............................................................. 12 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) ............. 12 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)............................. 12 Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)............................ 13 Turning the Power On ............................................................ 13 Panel Controls and Terminals 14 Front Panel ............................................................................. 14 Rear Panel ............................................................................. 15 Quick Guide Changing the Display Language 16 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 17 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN ............................................. 17 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL .............................. 18 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT 19 Play the Grand Piano Voice ................................................... 20 Fun Sounds 21 Drum Kits................................................................................ 21 Sound Effects ......................................................................... 21 The Metronome 22 Start the Metronome............................................................... 22 Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ........................................... 22 Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat............................................. 23 Adjusting the Metronome Volume .......................................... 24 Playing Styles 25 Select a Style Rhythm ............................................................ 25 Play Along with a Style ........................................................... 26 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 30 Using Songs 31 Select and Listen to a Song ................................................... 31 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 32 Change the Song Tempo ....................................................... 32 Play the Demo Song .............................................................. 33 Types of Songs ...................................................................... 34 Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 35 Display the Lyrics ................................................................... 36 The Easy Way to Play Piano 37 CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands.................................... 38 CHORD/FREE Type— Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only................ 40 MELODY Type—Play with One Finger .................................. 42 CHORD/MELODY— Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right ..... 44 Select a Song For a Lesson 48 Lesson 1—Waiting ................................................................. 49 Lesson 2—Your Tempo ......................................................... 52 Lesson 3—Minus One ............................................................ 53 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn .......................... 54 Play Using the Music Database 55 Change a Song’s Style 56 Try Out the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 56 Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................... 56 Record Your Own Performance 58 Track Configuration ................................................................ 58 Recording Procedure ............................................................. 59 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ......................................... 61 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song .. 62 Backup and Initialization 63 Backup ................................................................................... 63 Initialization............................................................................. 63 Reference Play with a Variety of Effects 68 Adding Harmony ..................................................................... 68 Adding Reverb ........................................................................ 69 Adding Chorus ........................................................................ 70 Panel Sustain ......................................................................... 71 Pitch Bend .............................................................................. 71 Handy Performance Features 72 Tap Start ................................................................................. 72 Touch Response Sensitivity ................................................... 72 One Touch Setting.................................................................. 73 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ............................... 74 Pitch Controls ......................................................................... 75 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 76 Pattern Variation (Sections).................................................... 76 Setting the Split Point ............................................................. 79 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................... 80 Adjusting the Style Volume..................................................... 80 Chord Basics .......................................................................... 81 Style File ................................................................................. 83 Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard .............................. 83 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ..................... 84 Song Settings 85 Song Volume .......................................................................... 85 A-B Repeat ............................................................................. 85 Muting Independent Song Parts ............................................. 86 Change the Melody Voice ...................................................... 86 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 87 Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................ 87 Recalling a Registration Memory............................................ 88 The Functions 89 Selecting and Setting Functions ............................................. 89 Using USB Flash Memory 92 Connecting a USB Flash Memory .......................................... 92 Formatting USB Flash Memory .............................................. 94 Saving Data ............................................................................ 95 Convert a User Song to SMF Format and Save ..................... 96 Loading User Files and Style Files ......................................... 97 Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory .............................. 98 Playing Data on a USB Flash Memory ................................... 99 Connections 100 Connectors ........................................................................... 100 Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................ 101 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer ..... 102 Remote Control of MIDI Devices .......................................... 103 Initial Send ............................................................................ 104 Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument ... 104 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 107 Important Notices about the CD-ROM.................................. 107 CD-ROM Contents ............................................................... 108 System Requirements .......................................................... 109 Software Installation ............................................................. 109 Appendix Troubleshooting .................................................................... 114 Messages ............................................................................. 116 Scores .................................................................................. 118 Voice List .............................................................................. 124 Drum Kit List ......................................................................... 128 Style List ............................................................................... 130 Music Database List ............................................................. 131 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM.......................... 132 Effect Type List ..................................................................... 133 MIDI Implementation Chart................................................... 134 MIDI Data Format ................................................................. 136 Specifications ....................................................................... 139 Index ..................................................................................... 140 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION Read these cautions carefully before you assemble or use the keyboard stand. These cautions are to promote safe use of the stand and to prevent injury and damage from occurring to you and others. By following these cautions carefully, your keyboard stand will provide you with safe and prolonged use. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Use the stand after assembly is complete. An uncompleted stand may overturn or the keyboard may drop. • Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing the stand on uneven surfaces may cause it to become unstable or overturn, the keyboard to drop, or injury. • Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed purpose. Placing other objects on the stand may result in the object dropping or the stand overturning. • Do not apply excessive force to the keyboard as it may cause the stand to overturn or the keyboard to drop. • Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws have been tight and firm before use. If not, the stand may overturn, the keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the parts as needed. Assembly Parts q 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) Back board Side boards w Joint connectors (4 pcs.) e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) Stand bases r 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) z Attach the stand bases. 1 w Joint connectors q 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws 10 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Making sure that the boards are facing the proper direction (the holes for the joint connectors should face inside). The left and right side boards are the same shape. Insert the joint connectors w into the holes as shown. The joint connectors have been installed properly if you can see the screw head on the connector. Attach the stand bases to the bottom of the side boards, using the 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws q. The left and right stand bases are the same shape, and there is no difference between their front-to-back orientation. If you have trouble screwing in the screws, use a screwdriver to rotate the joint connectors to the appropriate position—the → mark on the joint connectors indicates the location of the screw hole. Setting Up 2 x Attach the back board. e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screw Attach the back board, using the 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws e. CAUTION • Be careful not to drop the back board or touch the sharp metal fittings. c Put the keyboard on the stand. 3–4 Check the back-to-front orientation for stand, and carefully place the keyboard on the side boards. Slowly move the keyboard so that the holes on the bottom of the keyboard are properly aligned with the holes on the angle brackets. CAUTION • Be careful not to drop the keyboard or to get your fingers caught between the keyboard and the stand parts. v Install the keyboard to the stand. r 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws Fix the keyboard to the angle brackets, using the 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws r. ■ Post-assembly checklist Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the following points: • Are there any parts left over? ➔ If so, read the assembly instructions again and correct any errors you might have made. • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? ➔ If not, move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you play it or move it? ➔ If so, properly tighten all screws. • Also, if the keyboard makes a creaking noise or seems unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to the assembly instructions and diagrams and retighten all screws. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements  Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the instrument is set to STANDBY.  Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms.  Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.   AC power adaptor AC outlet Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. CAUTION The instrument speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/ OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. 12 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 101). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn the instrument’s power on. • Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on page 109. Turning the Power On Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. ● Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 13 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel Song Category List (page 33) Style Category List (page 130) u e i o q r w y t !1 !0 !3 !2 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 Front Panel q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 13 @0 [SONG] button................................. page 31 w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 13, 64 @1 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button........................ page 56 e FILE CONTROL [MENU], [EXECUTE] buttons................. pages 92–98 @2 [STYLE] button................................ page 25 t [SCORE] button ............................... page 35 @4 Dial ............................................pages 65, 89 y [CHORD FINGERING] button ......... page 83 @5 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons......................................pages 65, 89 u [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.................... page 38 i [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 55 o [FUNCTION] button ................. pages 66, 89 !0 LESSON [L], [R], [START] buttons .............................. page 49 !1 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 22 !2 [TEMPO/TAP] button ............... pages 32, 72 !3 SONG MEMORY [REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 59 !4 [REPEAT & LEARN]/ [ACMP ON/OFF] button........... pages 54, 26 !5 [A-B REPEAT]/ [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 85, 76 !6 [REW]/ [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 32, 76 !7 [FF]/[SYNC STOP] button ....... pages 32, 78 !8 [PAUSE]/ [SYNC START] button ............. pages 32, 77 !9 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 25, 32, 65 14 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual r @3 [VOICE] button ................................ page 17 f r [LYRICS] button ............................... page 36 @6 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 65, 89 @7 [DEMO] button................................. page 33 @8 [EXIT] button ................................... page 66 @9 REGIST MEMORY [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons.. page 87 #0 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .......... page 20 #1 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button................... page 19 #2 [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 18 #3 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 68 #4 [PITCH BEND] wheel....................... page 71 #5 Drum Kit........................................... page 21 The illustrations next to each key indicate the drum and percussion instruments assigned to the keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected. Panel Controls and Terminals Display (pages 66, 67) Music Database List (page 131) Voice Category List (page 124) @7 @0 @1 @4 @2 @3 @6 @5 #0 @8 #1 #2 #3 @9 #4 #5 Rear Panel #6 #7 #8 #9 $0 Rear Panel #6 CONTRAST knob............................. page 67 #8 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 12 #7 USB TO DEVICE terminal................ page 93 #9 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 12 USB TO HOST terminal ........... page 13, 100 $0 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 12 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 15 e d ck Gui ui Q Changing the Display Language Quick Guide This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to Japanese the lyrics, file names, demo display, and some messages will be displayed in Japanese where appropriate. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number of times until the “Language” item appears. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 The currently selected display language will appear below the “Language” item. When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the language as required. Language item The currently selected language 3 Select a display language. The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese. The language selection will be stored in the internal flash memory so that it is retained even when the power is turned off. 4 16 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The main voice selection display will appear. The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected voice number and name 2 Select the voice you want to play. While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “102 Flute” voice. Select 102 Flute 3 Play the keyboard. Adjusts volume. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 17 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. 1 Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button. The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off. When turned on the dual voice “DUAL” will appear in the MAIN display. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. Voice Number 2 Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The dual voice selection display will appear. Dual voice selection display The currently selected dual voice Hold for longer than a second 3 18 Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. For this example try selecting the “120 Vibraphone” voice. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Play the keyboard. Two voices will sound at the same time. Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 79). Split point Split voice 1 Main voice and dual voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button. The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When turned on the split voice “SPLIT” will appear in the MAIN display. The currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split point. Voice Number 2 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The split voice selection display will appear. Split voice selection display The currently selected split voice Hold for longer than a second DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 19 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Select the desired split voice. 4 Play the keyboard. Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example try selecting the “038 Folk Guitar” voice. Try selecting and playing a range of split voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. 20 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Fun Sounds This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties. Drum Kits Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different drum or percussion instrument. ◆ Drum Kit Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “128 Standard Kit 1”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. For details on the instruments included in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 128 to 139), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 128. Sound Effects The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 138 and 139). When either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard. ◆ Sound Effect Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “139 SFX Kit 2”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects! As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, and many other useful effects. “138 SFX Kit 1” includes lightning, running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore produce no sound. For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum Kit List” on page 129. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 21 e d ck Gui ui Q The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. Start the Metronome Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. 4/4 Current setting Adjusting the Metronome Tempo 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo 2 22 Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to 280. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Metronome Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the function “Time Signature–Numerator”. Hold for longer than a second Numerator (Number of beats per measure.) Denominator (The length of one beat.) 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. 3 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Signature–Denominator”. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. NOTE r f A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 23 The Metronome Adjusting the Metronome Volume r 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. f 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Metronome volume 3 24 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 160 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see page 130 for a complete list of the available styles). In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected style 2 Select a style. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided on page 130. NOTE • An external style file loaded into style number 161 can be selected and used in the same way as the internal styles. The style file must be loaded into style number 161 after transferring it to the instrument from a computer, or after connecting a USB flash memory device containing the style file to the instrument. File transfer instructions can be found on page 104, and load instructions are provided on page 97. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. NOTE • Style numbers 131, 143–160 have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 26, press the [START/STOP] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. Split point (54 : F#2) Auto accompaniment region 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. Flashes when sync start is on. 26 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual • The keyboard split point can be changed as required: refer to page 79. Playing Styles When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Try this! Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 28. These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progressions sound good with the styles. Split point Auto accompaniment region 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment region 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 76. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Styles Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment. In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall feel of the music you play. On page 26 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take your accompaniments to a new level. On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively creating a complete song. ■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Play the scores with the left hand. Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 26. * The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to produce the chord progressions. Split point Play to the left of the split point. Recommended Style 041 Euro Trance —Dance music with simple chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. F C G Am This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending. 28 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Recommended Style 148 Piano Boogie —3-chord boogie-woogie— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. C F C G F C Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Recommended Style 096 Bossa Nova —Bossa nova with jazz-style chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Dm Bm7 5 G7 CM7 FM7 E7 Am A7 This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 29 Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The function is called Multi Fingering. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 26). The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 54/F#2) Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range Root notes and the corresponding keys ■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C (9) C C • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C M7 C M7 (9) C6 C6 Cm C sus4 Cm Cm (b5) ( C aug C M7aug C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) C M7 C ) ) C M7 ( ) ( • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. (#11) (9) (b5) C7 ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. ) ( • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). (9) (9) (11) C m7 C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (#9) (b5) C7 ( C 7sus4 C7 ) ) ) ( ( ) (13) C7 ( C sus2 ( ) C 7aug (b13) (b9) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) C m7 * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. 30 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Using Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30 songs provided. Song Listen Lesson Record Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button The song selection display will appear. The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected song number and name 2 NOTE Select a song. Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 33. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. • Song files transferred from a computer or stored on a USB flash memory device connected to the instrument can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Song (Song numbers 36–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 104. The song highlighted here can be played DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 31 Using Songs 3 Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button again. Song start! Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song. NOTE • When an A-B repeat range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. Change the Song Tempo When using the song, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 32 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using Songs Play the Demo Song Press the [DEMO] button. The demo song will start playing. Listen to some of the outstanding instrument voices provided! The demo song will automatically repeat from the beginning after it has played all the way through. You can stop demo playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. ● Song List These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s Easy Song Arranger feature, songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Suggested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used. Category Main Demo Voice Demo Function Demo Piano Solo No. CHORD JetSet 2 CHORD Winter Serenade 3 CHORD Take off 4 CHORD Live! Grand Demo 5 CHORD Live! Orchestra Demo 6 CHORD Cool! Rotor Organ Demo 7 CHORD Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo 8 CHORD Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo 9 CHORD Hallelujah Chorus 10 CHORD Ave Maria 11 CHORD Nocturne op.9-2 12 For Elise 13 Maple Leaf Rag 14 Piano Ensemble Piano Accompaniment CHORD Name 1 Suggested Uses The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with the various features. These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. They make maximum use of the characteristics of each voice, and might serve as inspiration for your own compositions. Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair 15 CHORD Amazing Grace 16 CHORD Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans) 17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. 18 CHORD Scarborough Fair 19 CHORD Old Folks at Home 20 CHORD Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403) 21 CHORD Ep Ballad 22 CHORD Boogie Woogie 23 CHORD Rock Piano 24 CHORD Salsa 25 CHORD Country Piano 26 CHORD Gospel R&B 27 CHORD Medium Swing 28 CHORD Jazz Waltz 29 CHORD Medium Bossa 30 CHORD SlowRock (Can’t Help Falling In Love: George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore) A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band. These songs allow you to practice backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to master this important skill. : Includes chord data. The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 16, 20 and 30 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual. Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 33 Using Songs Types of Songs The following three types of songs can be used by the DGX-530/YPG-535. ● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument) ................Song numbers 001–030. ● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035. ● External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–. * The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 105 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. The chart below shows the basic processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song files from storage to playback. Hint! : You can have someone play a piece and temporarily save it in a user bank as a user song, then save it as SMF format to the USB memory from where it can be used as a lesson song. Computer Your own performance USB flash memory Song Record Transfer (page 58) (page 104) Song Connect (page 100) DGX-530/YPG-535 Song Storage locations Preset Songs (001–030) User Songs (031–035) The 30 songs built into the instrument. Song Flash Memory Song SMF conversion Save Play NOTE • User songs cannot produce score display as they are. If you convert a user song file to SMF and save it to USB flash memory, however, it becomes capable of producing score display and can be used with the lesson features. NOTE • Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the external song file flash memory area, and vice versa. 34 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual USB (036–) Song Using Songs Displaying the Song Score This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs. Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs stored in USB flash memory or flash memory. And although user songs you record yourself cannot display a score as is, they can be converted to SMF (Standard MIDI File) format and stored to USB flash memory, from where they can be played with score display. 1 2 Select a song. Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 31. Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will appear. There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff. These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed. NOTE • Both chords and lyrics will be shown in single-staff score display of a song that includes chord and lyric data. • When there are many lyrics they may be displayed in two rows a measure. • Some lyrics or chords may be abbreviated if the selected song has a lot of lyrics. • Small notes that are hard to read may be easier to read after you use the quantize function (page 91). Single-staff Marker Melody score Chord Lyrics NOTE • No lyrics are shown in doublestaff. Double-staff 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. 4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of the score to indicate the current location. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 35 Using Songs Display the Lyrics If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display. No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed. 1 Select a song. 2 Press the [LYRICS] button. Select a song between 16, 20, and 30 by performing steps 1 and 2 described on page 31. The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display. NOTE • Songs downloaded from the Internet or commercially available song files, including XF format files (page 6), are compatible with the lyrics display features as long as they are standard MIDI file format files containing lyric data. Lyrics display may not be possible with some files. NOTE • If the lyrics display shows garbled characters, try changing the display language (page 16). Song title, lyricist, and composer. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the display. The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song. Lyrics and chord display ■ Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display Number 36 Name 016 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans) 020 Against all odds (Collins 0007403) 030 Can’t Help Falling In Love (George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore) DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! You could even just tap one key and the results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results for you. ● Chord ...................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-balanced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play anything with both your left and right hands. ● Chord/Free........... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with lefthand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to support the melody you are playing with your right hand. Split point Play your own melody with the right hand. ● Melody ................... This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any keys with just one finger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve never played a keyboard instrument before! ● Chord/Melody .... Play the melody of the selected song with one finger on the right-hand section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the keyboard using the Chord type. Split point Refer to page 46 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 37 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. 2 Select the CHORD type. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave Maria”. When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song can be seen in the display! NOTE • Using Songs (page 31) The song displayed here will be played. ● What is a Song? You know the normal meaning of this word, but in this instrument the term “Song” refers to the data that makes up a complete song. The performance assistant technology features uses the chord and melody data, and should always be used with a song (page 31). 38 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin playing yourself from the fifth measure. The keys you should play will be shown in the display. 5 Play on the keyboard. Before After Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at measure five the notes will come out according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. This is the performance assistant technology Chord type. NOTE • The score for Ave Maria is provided on page 120. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 39 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. 2 Select the CHORD/FREE type. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord/Free Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Free type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “011 Nocturne”. NOTE • Using Songs (page 31) The song displayed here will be played. 40 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display. 5 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an FA-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type. NOTE • The score for Nocturne is provided on page 122. Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand part in the display. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 41 The Easy Way to Play Piano MELODY Type—Play with One Finger See page 46 for some hints on how to play melodies. 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. 2 Select the MELODY type. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Select Melody Hold for longer than a second Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. NOTE • Using Songs (page 31) The song displayed here will be played. 42 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself (step 5). Song start! 5 Play on the keyboard. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then tap a key with one finger of your right hand in time with the music. You can play any key. If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display. Sounds like a melody! How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one finger thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type! You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 43 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. 2 Select the CHORD/MELODY type. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord/Melody Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. NOTE • Using Songs (page 31) The song displayed here will be played. 44 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to eight measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ninth measure. 5 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand. You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your left hand. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type. If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 45 The Easy Way to Play Piano Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! Here are a few hints for using the Chord type. If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the lefthand section of the keyboard. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). The chord information included in the song is displayed in the lower area of the MAIN display. You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger → middle finger → ring finger). Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. 46 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual ● Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. The Easy Way to Play Piano Make Use of the Score in the Melody Type. If you want to play the melody with the correct rhythm, use the onscreen score feature. Displaying the Score. After performing steps 1 to 4 on page 42, press the [SCORE] button. The melody score will appear. Marker Chord Melody The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback. If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm. Play while watching the marker ● Songs That Can Be Used With the performance assistant technology. When the Chord type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only work with songs that include melody data. In order to find out if a song includes the required data, first select the song and then press the [SCORE] button. If chords appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Chord type or any combination type that includes the Chord type. If melody appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Melody type or any combination type that includes the Melody type. ● External Songs and the performance assistant technology. Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as long as they include the required chord and/or melody data. See page 105 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 47 e d ck Gui ui Q Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) downloaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (page 104) During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! Lesson Flow: Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! Select the song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. Lesson start! The practice methods: ● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes. ● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. ● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. 48 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 Select a song for your lesson. 2 Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want to use for your lesson. As listed on page 33 there are a variety of song types. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Select R for right-hand lesson. Select L for left-hand lesson. Select LR for bothhands lesson. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 49 Select a Song For a Lesson 4 Start Lesson 1. NOTE Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... An explanation of the selected lesson will appear on the display for a few seconds before the lesson begins. • If the score display is not ready by the time the explanation display disappears, prepare-inprogress message will appear on the display until the score is ready. In this case the “R1” indicates that righthand lesson 1 has been selected. (Lesson 1) (Lesson 2) (Lesson 3) (Song Lesson off) Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played is indicated by a dot (●) on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the correct note. The triangular marker (▼) above the score indicates playback progress. ▼ Marker Left-hand part ● Marker 50 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) Select a Song For a Lesson ● Shifting the keyboard left or right. The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by pressing the [+] or [-] button. The displayed range (61 keys) Actual keyboard range (DGX-530/YPG-535 = 88 keys) 61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. The DGX-530/ YPG-535 actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or low notes, those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be shown on the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or right of the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard left or right so you can see the notes (the ● marker will appear on the appropriate key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson. 5 Stop the Lesson mode You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. ■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 91). DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 51 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 49). 2 Start Lesson 2. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... In this case the “R2” indicates that right-hand lesson 2 has been selected. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Play while following the score marker Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 52 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 49). 2 Start Lesson 3. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... In this case the “R3” indicates that right-hand lesson 3 has been selected. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to play. ▼ Marker Left-hand part Right-hand part ● Marker (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 53 Select a Song For a Lesson Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback q w Song playback direction Oops! A mistake! 54 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Press immediately NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. e d ck Gui ui Q Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. A Music Database list will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 131 of the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “158 Patrol”. NOTE • Music Database (MDB) files transferred from a computer or stored on a USB flash memory device connected to the instrument can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Music Databases (MDB numbers 301–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 104. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 26). Refer to pages 28–30 for information about playing chords. Split Point If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this point you can check the assigned voice and style. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 55 e d ck Gui ui Q Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Try Out the Easy Song Arranger You can try out the Easy Song Arranger feature using the internal Hallelujah Chorus song. Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009 Hallelujah Chorus.” Press the [START/STOP] button begin playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song Arranger feature will appear on the display. As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall image of the song. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. NOTE • The score for Hallelujah Chorus is provided on page 118. Using the Easy Song Arranger 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The Song Select display will appear. The currently selected song name and number will be highlighted. The currently selected song number and name are displayed here. 2 56 Select a Song. Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Change a Song’s Style 3 Listen to the song. NOTE Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. • When playing song numbers 010, 011, and 020 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. Song start! 4 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The Style Select display will appear. The currently selected style name and number will be highlighted. The currently selected style number and name are displayed here. 5 6 Select a style. Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button). NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. Select a voice part. If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected melody voice will be displayed. Hold for longer than a second NOTE • The Difference Between 7 MELODY R and MELODY L ... Select a voice you want to play as a song melody. Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice changes (if you have stopped the song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button). Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accompaniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the melody part played by the left hand. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 57 e d ck Gui ui Q Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved as user songs, they can be converted to SMF (Standard MID File) format files and saved to USB flash memory (page 96) and used with score display. So when inspiration strikes and you create a great melody, you can save it in both listenable and written score form. ■ Recordable Data You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track. Each track can be recorded individually. ● Melody Track [1]–[5] ...........Record the melody parts. ● Style Track [A] .................... Records the chord part. NOTE • Up to approximately 10,000 notes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the melody tracks. Up to approximately 5,500 chord changes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the style track. • User songs cannot display a score as is, but they can be converted to SMF (Standard MIDI File) format and stored to USB flash memory (page 96), from which they can be played with score display. Track Configuration To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later. Melody Chords Specify track(s) and record • Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody part (MELODY R) Track 1 Right-hand melody Track 2 Track 3 Left-hand melody Track 4 Track 5 Other performance data Track A Style • Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody part (MELODY L) • Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” performance data. • Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accompaniment) part. The parts played by each track when a user song is played back. NOTE • The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L ... Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accompaniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the melody part played by the left hand. 58 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Record Your Own Performance Recording Procedure 1 From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. ◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display. CAUTION • If you record to track that contains previously-recorded data the previous data will be overwritten and lost. NOTE • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. Press and hold ◆ Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. The selected track will be highlighted in the display. NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while recording is in progress. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 59 Record Your Own Performance 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. Current measure Recording starts 4 Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. or If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box border. ● To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while recording new tracks. ● To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 5 When the recording is done ... ◆ To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 31). 1 Press the [SONG] button from the MAIN display. 2 The current song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. ◆ To Save a User Song to USB flash memory ➔ page 95 ◆ To save a User Song to USB flash memory in SMF format ➔ page 96. 60 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 61) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. Record Your Own Performance ● Data that cannot be recorded • Split voice • The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. Reverb type, Chorus type, Time signature, Style number, Style volume, Tempo (When the style track is recorded) Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. Press and hold Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the song. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Song Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Song Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 61 Record Your Own Performance Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 2 From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the track. 62 A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual NOTE • To execute the Track Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Track Clear operation. Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. ● The Backup Parameters • User Songs • Style Files • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Language Selection, Panel Sustain, Master EQ type, Chord Fingering Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory, user songs, style file—turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. ■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear song, style and music database files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 63 Basic Operation Basic Operation Overall DGX-530/YPG-535 control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 1 Select a basic function. 2 Select an item or value. Display (pages 66, 67) ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. Select an auto-accompaniment style. Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. 64 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 2 Use the dial to select an item or value When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. The currently selected item is highlighted in the display. In this example the [VOICE] button has been pressed. ■Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● r Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. r Increase f Decrease The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. Example: VOICE SELECT Display r ] mark. f CATEGORY button [ CATEGORY button [ Press briefly to decrement. Press briefly to increment. Select the category shown here. The first voice in the selected category is selected. In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. f ● Number Buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0] → [0] → [3] • [0] → [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. ] mark. r ● [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. ● CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. f ● Dial Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. 3 Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 65 Basic Operation The Displays ● Display Names All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for different modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display. ● MAIN Display Title To Return To the MAIN Display Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN display. You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the [EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel. r f ● FUNCTION Display (page 89) The FUNCTION display provides access to 46 utility functions. The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 65) to select 46 different groups of functions. Press the CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required. Function item Value The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. 66 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation MAIN Display Items The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. * Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on the rear panel of the instrument for optimum display legibility. A-B Repeat Tempo Appears when repeat playback is engaged. Transpose Measure Number Function ON/Off Icons Dual Appears when the Dual Voice is on. When this icon is showing a second voice is “layered” on and played with the main voice. Chord Display Split Style (Auto-accompaniment) Status (page 26) Registration Memory Status (page 87) Appears when the Split Voice is on. When this icon is showing different voices can be played to the left and right of the keyboard split point. Performance assistant technology Appears when the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button is pressed to turn accompaniment on after selecting a style. When showing the keyboard range to the left of the split point is used for accompaniment chord recognition. Shows the selected bank number. Shows the memory numbers that contain data. A border appears around the selected number. Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. The style pattern name. Song Track Status (pages 58, 86) Appears when the performance assistant technology is on. Harmony Appears when Harmony is on. When this icon is showing harmony notes will be added to the main voice. File Control When this icon is showing you can control file operations. Highlighted during user song recording. The track(s) selected for recording are highlighted during user-song recording. Only tracks that contain data are displayed. A border appears around a selected track that contains data. No border appears around a Muted track. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 67 Reference e erenc ef R Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again. Hold for longer than a second. The currently selected harmony type When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. NOTE • When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 133 for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second. The currently selected harmony type will be displayed. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) • Harmony type 01 to 05 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 26). • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. 68 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 91). Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Reverb Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 133 for information about the available reverb types. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. Selected reverb type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 133 for information about the available reverb types. Reverb Type item ● Adjusting the Reverb Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 90). DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 69 Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Chorus The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. Selected chorus type. Chorus Type item ● Adjusting the Chorus Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 90). 70 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Play with a Variety of Effects Panel Sustain This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 3 You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn panel sustain on or off. NOTE • The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the panel sustain function is turned on. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Sustain item. The current setting is displayed. Pitch Bend The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice such as the “045 Overdriven” guitar voice (page 17), you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects. You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 90. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 71 e erenc ef R Handy Performance Features Tap Start You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song playback by pressing the button just twice. Touch Response Sensitivity You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 3 Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics —i.e. greater sensitivity. A setting of “4” results in a fixed touch response, or no level change no matter how hard or how soft you play the keys. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Touch Sensitivity item. The currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. Touch Sensitivity item 72 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2 on page 17). 4 Use the dial to change songs, then play the keyboard and listen to the voice. You should hear a different keyboard voice than you played in step 3. Watch the display while changing songs and you will see that different voices are selected for each song. Use the dial to select voice number 000. 2 Select and play back any song (steps 1 to 3 on page 31). 3 Play the keyboard and remember the sound of the voice. If you have stopped playback at some point during this procedure press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 73 Handy Performance Features Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the master EQ type function “Master EQ Type”. The currently selected EQ type will appear. The currently selected master EQ type. 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ setting. Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. 74 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Transpose item Tuning item Can be set between -12 and +12 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. f r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Can be set between -100 and +100 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 75 e erenc ef R Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 25 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) The DGX-530/YPG-535 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Ending Main A/B Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 76 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. The name of the selected section—MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Appears when auto accompaniment is on. You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. The indicator will flash when the synchro start standby mode will be engaged. left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 30. Split point Accompaniment range ● Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 77 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. The style will play while you are playing the keys This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. 78 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Style playback will stop when you release the keys Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 000 (C-2) through 127 (G8). Split point (54 : F#2) Main voice Split voice NOTE • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. • The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played. NOTE • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 89). r r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Split point item. f 2 Use the CATEGORY [ • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 79 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 30). Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on after pressing the [STYLE] button. Accompaniment range Appears when auto accompaniment is on Adjusting the Style Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. f Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. 80 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd 3rd Root In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Major chord CM Minor 3rd Minor chord Cm Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the DGX-530/YPG-535.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th C M7 Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th 7 th chord Flatted 5 th Major chord C 7sus4 C m7 C7 Major 7 th 7 th, suspended 4 th (b5) (b5) Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th C7 Minor 7 th chord Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 81 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions ■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Display C (9) C9 C6 (9) C6 C 69 * C M7 CM7 Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - b5 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 Suspended fourth [sus4] Sixth ninth [6(9)] Major seventh [M7] (9) C M79 * (#11) CM7#11 * (b5) Cb5 * C M7 (b5) CM7b5 * 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm9 Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Cm7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 C M7 C M7 C (9) (9) C m7 Cm79 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 Cm711 * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 C m7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Seventh [7] Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] Seventh ninth [7(9)] Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 (11) (9) (b5) CmM79 * Cm7b5 C mM7 C dim CmM7b5 * C dim7 Cdim7 C7 C7 (b5) Cdim (b9) C7b9 (b13) C7b13 (9) C79 (#11) C7#11 (13) C713 (#9) C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 C7#9 Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 C sus2 Csus2 * * These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function. NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2. 82 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Style File This instrument features 160 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style number 161 and used in the same way as the internal styles. For details on loading the style file, see “Loading User Files and Style Files” on page 97. In order to load a style file it is necessary to first either transfer the style file to the instrument from a computer, or connect a USB flash memory containing the style file to the USB TO DEVICE connector. Refer to “Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer” on page 102 for details on the file transfer procedure. If you use a USB flash memory refer to “Loading User Files and Style Files” on page 97. Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard In “Play Along with a Style” on page 26 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however, chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 30) can be detected. 1 Press the [CHORD FINGERING] button to select the function “Chord Fingering”. 2 Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 83 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the LESSON [START] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Notation of chord Chord name (root and type) 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. • Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the performance assistant technology feature. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accom- paniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 84 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Song volume item Can be set between 000 and 127 2 Use the CATEGORY [ f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A 2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec- ond time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). B 1 Play the song (page 31) and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 85 Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The border around the track number in the display disappears when that track is muted. Refer to page 58 for information about the song track configuration. No track number ... no data. Track number without border ... track contains data but is muted. Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted. Change the Melody Voice You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody voice of a user song. Press the lesson [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously so that “LR” appears in the upper right corner of the MAIN display. Select the song and play it. 1 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MELODY L) display will appear so you can select the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the [VOICE] button alternates between VOICE SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L. Hold for longer than a second 86 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 2 Use the dial to select the voice. As you select different melody voices, only the melody voice changes while the song will remain the same. e erenc ef R Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of two setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Up to 16 presets (eight banks of two each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2] button while holding the [MEMORY/ BANK] button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display in order to check the bank and registration memory numbers. Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but- tons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. Bank number NOTE • You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration memory button into USB flash memory as the user file or to a computer as the backup file. NOTE NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 87 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. ● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level) • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain ON/OFF • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. You can check whether the panel settings are stored in registration memory 1 or 2 by pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1] or [2], containing the settings you want to recall. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. 88 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. There are 46 function parameters in all. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 90. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. Direct numeric entry. 3 Select a function. Function category Previous item r f Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. Next item The selected function Value Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 63 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 63. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 89 The Functions ● Function Setting List Category VOLUME Function Item Range/Settings Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Pitch Bend Range 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. Split Point 000–127(C-2–G8) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard), 4 (Off) Determines the sensitivity of the feature. Chord Fingering 1(Multi Finger), 2(FullKeyboard) Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well. Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Reverb Type 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 133) Chorus Type 1–5 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 133) Sustain ON/OFF Determines whether or not panel sustain is always applied to the MAIN/ DUAL voices. Panel sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. (page 71) Master EQ Type 1(Speaker 1), 2(Speaker 2), 3(Headphones), 4(Line Out 1), 5(Line Out 2) Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. OVERALL MAIN VOICE DUAL VOICE SPLIT VOICE EFFECT 90 Description DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Functions Category Function Item Range/Settings Description Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 133) Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. PAT P.A.T. Type CHORD, CHORD/FREE, MELODY, CHORD/MELODY Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. (See the list on page 37) PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 102). Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 102) External Clock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 102) Keyboard Out ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Setup YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator 2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Quantize 1(1/4 note), 2(1/4 note triplet), 3(1/8 note), 4(1/8 note triplet), 5(1/16 note), 6(1/16 note triplet), 7(1/32 note), 8(1/32 note triplet) Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this value will not be shown in the score. Right-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Left-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. English/Japanese Determines the display language for the demo displays, song file names, lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the file names are displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting exists, the setting here is used. HARMONY MIDI METRONOME SCORE LESSON UTILITY LANGUAGE Language * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 91 e erenc ef R Using USB Flash Memory USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, user songs created on the instrument and the registered settings can be saved to or loaded from the memory medium. USB flash memory can also be used to transfer song data downloaded from the Internet to the instrument, where it can be used with the performance assistant technology (page 37) and Lesson (page 48) features described in the Quick Guide. Furthermore, user songs saved to USB flash memory in MIDI file format can also be used with these features. In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them. Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 93, and the “Using USB Storage Devices” section on page 93. Connecting a USB Flash Memory 1 Connect a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to insert it with the proper orientation. 2 Check that the file control icon is shown in the MAIN display. Appears while the memory device is being mounted. File Control Icon A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Messages” on page 116 for an explanation of each message. You can go to the FILE CONTROL display from which you can access USB flash memory operations by pressing the [MENU] button from this display. (Do not press this button now, but only when instructed to in the sections below.) Menu Reference Page Format 94 Save 95 SMF Save 96 Load 97 Delete 98 NOTE • No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related to file functions will be active. • The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following cases: • During style or song playback. • During a lesson. • While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory. 92 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using USB Flash Memory ■ Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. ● Compatible USB devices • USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive) The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: ● Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ NOTE • Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. ● Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. The number of USB storage device to be used Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 94). CAUTION • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save and Delete operations). CAUTION • Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 93 Using USB Flash Memory Formatting USB Flash Memory New USB flash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or CAUTION • If you format a USB flash memory that already contains data, all of the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data when using the format function. the [+] button, and the format operation will begin. CAUTION 1 After connecting the USB flash memory to be formatted to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, check that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 6 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Format item. The display prompts you for confirmation. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button and the display prompts you for confirmation. You can press the [-] button at this point to cancel the operation. 94 • Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using USB Flash Memory Saving Data Three types of data are saved to one “User File” by this operation: user song, style file, and registration memory data. When you save a user song the style file and registration memory are also saved automatically. 1 Make sure that a properly formatted USB flash memory has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. Cursor left r f 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the User File Save item. A default file name will automatically be created. Delete character The dial selects characters Cursor right Cursor 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis● To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 6. NOTE 7 play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. The user song will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory. • Up to 100 user files can be saved to a single USB flash memory. • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. • If there is not enough capacity left on the USB flash memory to save the data an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted files from the USB flash memory to make more memory available (page 98), or use a different USB flash memory. • Refer to the “Messages” list on page 116 for other possible errors that might prevent you from completing the operation. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. 5 Change the file name as necessary. • The [-] button moves the cursor to the left, and the [0] button moves it to the right. • Use the dial to select a character for the current cursor location. • The [+] button deletes the character at the cursor location. CAUTION • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 8 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 95 Using USB Flash Memory Convert a User Song to SMF Format and Save This operation converts a user song (song numbers 031–035) to SMF Format 0 and saves the file to USB flash memory. ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. 1 Make sure that a properly formatted USB flash memory has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. ● To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 7. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. 7 Change the file name as necessary. Refer to “Saving Data” on page 95 for filename entry. 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the SMF Save item. The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will be highlighted. Cursor The name of the file to be saved 8 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 9 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. The user song will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory. The source user song name. CAUTION 4 Select the source user song. You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to select the first user song. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The DESTINATION SONG will be highlighted, and a default name will appear for the converted song file. • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 10 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. 96 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using USB Flash Memory Loading User Files and Style Files User files, style files, and styles residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded into the instrument. The style file will be loaded into style number 161. If the required style file has already been transferred to the instrument from a computer using the Musicsoft Downloader application, start from step 2, below. Refer to “Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer” on page 102 for details on transferring style files. 4 Use the dial to select the user file or CAUTION • If you load a User File user song (031–035), style file, and registration memory data will be overwritten by the newly loaded data. If you only load a style file, only the style file will be overwritten. Save important data to a USB flash memory before loading data that will overwrite it. style file you want to load. All user files in the USB flash memory will be displayed first, followed by the style files. NOTE 1 With the USB flash memory containing the file you want to load connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector, check that the File Control icon is shown in the MAIN display. • Style files must be located in the root directory. Style files located within folders will not be recognized. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the load operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but- the [+] button, and the load operation will begin. ton. r f 3 CAUTION Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the Load item. • Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 97 Using USB Flash Memory Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory This procedure deletes user file and SMF file from a USB flash memory. 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory containing the file(s) you want to delete has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the Delete item. 4 Select the file you want to delete. You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to select the first song or user file on the USB flash memory. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the delete operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the delete operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. 98 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using USB Flash Memory Playing Data on a USB Flash Memory IMPORTANT • In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a computer or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB flash memory’s root directory or a first-level/second-level folder in the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-level folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. USB flash memory (Root) Song File Song File Can be selected/played. Song File Song File Cannot be selected/played. 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory containing the song or music database you want to play has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 2 Press the [SONG] button if a song file is 3 to be played, or the [MUSIC DATABASE] button if a Music Database is to be played. Files of the corresponding type will be displayed. Use the dial to select the file you want to play: Song numbers 36 and higher, or Music Database numbers 301 and higher. 4 Play the selected file in the same way the internal files are played: press the [START/STOP] button, or play on the keyboard. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 99 e erenc ef R Connections Connectors q q USB TO DEVICE terminal This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 93. 100 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual w w USB TO HOST terminal This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 101 for more information. Connections Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 102). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 104). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com- puter. The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on pages 109–111. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB terminal on the instrument using an AB type USB cable (USB cable sold separately). The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft Downloader application that allows you to transfer song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song files, see pages 104, 111. ■ Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard or play back a song, etc.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Computer Instrument USB cable DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 101 Connections Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB terminal USB terminal Computer Instrument USB cable ■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely may be caused by Local Control being set to off. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. r CAUTION f Item CAUTION • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 102 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. Connections ■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* OFF OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON Local 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. NOTE r f • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate it (page 89). Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (A-1 and A#-1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. A#-1 A-1 C7: Fast forward B6: Start A6: Stop G6: Rewind F6: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E6: Metronome ON/OFF DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 103 Connections Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument MIDI songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM can be transferred to the instrument. Backup file can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. In order to transfer files between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USBMIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CDROM Installation Guide on page 107 for installation details. ● Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. • Data Capacity: 875KB 512 files total for the Song, Style and Music Database. • Data Format Song: .mid SMF format 0/1 Style: .sty Music Database: .mfd Backup File: 08PG88.BUP 104 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual ■With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 105. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example. ● Backup file can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 106. Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. Connections ■Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory ● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (page 109). At this point you can select a Style or Music Database file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer it to the instrument in the same way as a song file. 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and then “Flash memory”. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-down menu that appears. Doubleclick the “SampleData” Folder on the window. Select the file from the “SongData” Folder you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click the CD-ROM drive q Click “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. NOTE • Files transferred to a USB flash memory root directory or the instrument’s flash memory using the Musicsoft Downloader—any location outside the USER FILES folder on the USB flash memory device— cannot be deleted via the instrument’s file control display. Use the Musicsoft Downloader delete button to delete such files. w Double-click “SampleData” Folder → “SongData” Folder, and click a song file. e Click “Open” DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 105 Connections 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. CAUTION • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. ■Transfer a Backup file from the instrument to a computer ● ● ● You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup file” containing backup data (page 63), including the five User Songs stored on the instrument, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “08PG88.BUP” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transfer backup files using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. CAUTION ● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... In order to use songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. r f 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. 106 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual • The backup data, including the five User Songs’ is transmitted/ received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. CAUTION • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. e erenc ef R Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of this manual before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. • This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. • The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. Important Notices about the CD-ROM ● Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 109 for software installation instructions. CAUTION • Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on any playback device other than a computer. The resulting high-volume noise may cause hearing damage or damage to the playback device. ● Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 107 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide CD-ROM Contents e r Folder Name q w Application / Data Name Contents Musicsoft Downloader This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory. DMN_ Digital Music Notebook Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and online service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your favorite songs. You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook. DMN_FlashDemo Digital Music Notebook Flash Demo Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music Notebook. Song Book Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11, 16, 20 and song 30 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual beginning on page 118. q MSD_ w e SongBook USBdrv2k_ USB-MIDI Driver (Windows 2000/XP) USBdrvVista_ USB-MIDI Driver (Windows Vista/XP x64) r SampleData SongData MIDI 70 songs StyleData 5 style files MDB 5 music database files This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via USB. These songs, styles, or music database can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument functions. In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer. You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/ ■Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Please read the Software License Agreement on page 137 before opening the CD-ROM package. 1 Check the system requirements to make sure that the software will run on your computer. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The start window should appear automatically. 3 Install the USB-MIDI driver to the com- puter. Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on page 109 for installation and setup instructions. 108 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 4 Connect the instrument to the com- puter. The connection procedure is described on page 101. 5 Install the software. Musicsoft Downloader: See page 111. 6 Launch the software. For further software operation refer to the online help supplied with the software. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 112 when you have trouble with installing the driver. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide System Requirements Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display Musicsoft Downloader Windows 2000/ XP Home Edition/ XP Professional/Vista *Only 32-bit is supported. 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family (500 MHz or higher is recommended) 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) USB Driver for Windows 2000/XP Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional 166 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) at least 3 MB of free space — USB Driver for Windows Vista/XP x64 Windows Vista/XP Professional x64 Edition 800 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium® /Celeron® processor family or Intel® 64 compatible processor 512 MB or more at least 3 MB of free space — Digital Music Notebook Windows XP Home/ Professional Edition, Service Pack 1a (SP1a) more/Windows Vista *Only 32-bit is supported. 400 MHz or higher processor clock speed (Intel® Pentium® / Celeron® Processor family, or compatible processor recommended) 128 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) at least 150 MB of free space 1024 x 768 HighColor (16-bit) Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/ Vista *Only 32-bit is supported. 1 GHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (1.4 GHz or more is recommended) 256 MB or more Digital Music Notebook (Requirements for playing content with video included.) Software Installation ● Uninstall (Removing the Software) Installed software can be removed from your computer as follows: From the Windows Start menu select Start → Settings → Control panel → Add or Remove Applications → Install and Uninstall. Select the item you want to remove and click [Add or Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the selected software. NOTE • The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on the OS version you are using. ■ Installing the USB-MIDI Driver● ● ● ● In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI devices connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI devices via a USB cable. Computer Sequence software USB Cable MIDI device Driver • Windows 2000 installation ➔ page 110. • Windows XP installation ➔ page 110. • Windows Vista installation ➔ page 111. Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My Computer” folder. The root directory of the CDROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 109 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the driver in Windows 2000 Installing the driver in Windows XP 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- 2 2 3 4 5 6 trator” account to log on to Windows 2000. Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing] ➔ [File Signature Verification], and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file signature” and click [OK]. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the Found New Hardware Wizard. Click [Next]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. Select the radio button for “Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]”, then click [Next]. Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box, deselect all other check boxes, then click [Next]. 3 4 5 6 NOTE • If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g., D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation. 7 Deselect the “Install one of the other drivers”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes]. 8 When the installation is complete, the 9 Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) Restart the computer. The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 7 trator” account to log on to Windows XP. Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click “Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed. Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing Options] and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK]. Click the [OK] button to close System Properties, and then click “X” in the upper right of the window to close the Control Panel. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system launches the Found New Hardware Wizard automatically. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) If the Wizard window prompts you to specify whether or not to connect to Windows Update, select the radio button for “No, not this time”, then click [Next]. Select the radio button for “Install the software automatically (recommended)”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click [Continue Anyway]. 8 When the installation is complete, the Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 9 Restart the computer. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 110 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE • This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer. 10 When using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, the Support Module must be installed. After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the connected USB devices, select “My Computer” from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Select “USBdrvVista_” → “XPx64SupportModule” → “Setup.exe” and launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the onscreen directions. NOTE • Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary, even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USBMIDI driver. Installing the driver in Windows Vista 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis2 3 trator” account to log on to Windows Vista. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the “Found New Hardware” window. Click “Locate and install driver software (recommended)”. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.). NOTE • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. 4 If a message allowing Windows to search 5 online for driver software appears, click “Don’t search online.” If a message prompting you to insert the disk that came with your device appears, click [Next]. The system starts the installation. NOTE • If the “Windows Security” window appears, confirm this software is authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install]. 6 (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. ■Installing the Musicsoft Downloader and Digital Music Notebook Applications ● ● ● IMPORTANT • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows 2000, XP or Vista. • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows, XP or Vista. IMPORTANT • When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Internet Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer. IMPORTANT • Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Notebook content. Credit card processing may not be possible for some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make sure that your credit card can be used. NOTE • Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at the end of this manual before using the application. 1 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start window will appear automatically showing software applications. NOTE • If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your “My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and proceed to step 2, below. 2 Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital Music Notebook]. 3 Click the [install] button and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. For Digital Music Notebook operating instructions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music Notebook application and click “Help”. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help”. * You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader at the following Internet URL. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ When the installation is complete, the system displays the message “The software for this device has been successfully installed.” Click [Close]. IMPORTANT • Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application can be used. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 111 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ■Troubleshooting The driver cannot be installed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP, or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP, or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista.) * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type”. 3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device”. If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? • Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ Playback response is delayed. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? • Is any other application or device driver running? Cannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. You may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. How can I remove the driver? [Windows 2000/XP/Vista] 1 Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on Windows. Close all applications and windows that are open. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. 4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. 3 Select “My Computer” from the Start menu. 5 Install the driver again. • Windows 2000 users..... see page 110 • Windows XP users........ see page 110 • Windows Vista users .... see page 111 4 Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. 5 Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_” folder ➔ “uninstall” folder ➔ “uninstall.exe” file and launch “uninstall.exe.” file. When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver? (page 109) • Is the USB cable connected correctly? 112 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the driver. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE • When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from “USBdrvVista_” folder. NOTE • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. 6 A message asking you to restart your computer in order to complete the uninstall procedure will appear. Driver removal will be complete when you have restarted your computer. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 113 Appendix Troubleshooting ■ For the Instrument Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 102.) Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard, etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 84), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 102. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 90) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 79). Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 131 or a style between 143 and 160 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143– 160 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or there are Japanese characters in the display messages. Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to English. (See page 16) 114 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution The appropriate display does not appear when the [SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or [VOICE] button is pressed. Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons. The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off. The ACMP indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06–12 you need to play two notes at the same time. The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper area of the MAIN display and the USB device does not respond. Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 115 Messages LCD Message Comment Access error! Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash memory. All Memory Clearing... Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power off during data transmission. Are you sure? Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not. Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory. Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled. Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs. Com Mode Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played back. Completed Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Copy File Displayed while copying a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application. Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Delete File Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. Delete OK ? Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not. Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader. Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged. End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed. Error! Displayed when writing has failed. “File information area is not large enough.” Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total number of files have become too many. File is not found. Indicates there is no file. “File too large. Loading is impossible.” Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too large. Flash Clearing... Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal flash memory. Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not. Formatting... Displayed while formatting. Load OK ? Confirms whether loading is executed or not. Loading... Displayed while loading data. Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted. Media capacity is full. Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory becomes full. Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording. “MIDI receive buffer overflow.” Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to proceed. Move File Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. “Now Writing... (Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise the data may be damaged.)” Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while writing. Doing so may result in data loss. OverCurrent Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. 116 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Messages LCD Message Comment Overwrite ? Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not. Please Wait... Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying scores and lyrics. Rename File Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader. Save OK ? Confirms whether saving is executed or not. Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist. Saving... Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while saving. Doing so may result in data loss. Send OK? Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not. Sending... Displayed while transmitting data. “Since the media is in use now, this function is not available.” Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being accessed. Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not. “The limit of the media has been reached.” Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory structure has become too complicated. The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted. “The media is write-protected.” Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use. “The song data is too large to be converted to notation.” Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too large. There are too many files. Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. “This function is not available now.” Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is executing another job. [nnn] “file name” Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the receiving block. NOTE • Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages necessary to be explained only. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 117 Scores This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece. Song No. 9 q =123 (Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger) Hallelujah Chorus 118 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Scores DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 119 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 10 q =61 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Ave Maria P.A.T. Type =CHORD Your Turn. Repeatedly Play the Same Key. 120 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Scores DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 121 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 11 q =108 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Nocturne op.9-2 P.A.T. Type =CHORD/FREE 122 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Scores DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 123 Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system, in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the transmitted program change numbers to select the appropriate sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program change number 1. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Voice No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 124 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 000 113 001 Live! Grand Piano 000 114 001 Live! Warm Grand Piano 000 112 001 Grand Piano 000 112 002 Bright Piano 000 112 007 Harpsichord 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano 000 113 003 CP 80 E.PIANO 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 000 118 005 Cool! Suitcase Electric Piano 000 119 005 Cool! Electric Piano 000 113 006 Hyper Tines 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano 000 114 008 E.Clavichord 000 112 008 Clavi ORGAN 000 118 019 Cool! Organ 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2 000 112 019 Rock Organ 000 114 019 Purple Organ 000 112 018 Click Organ 000 116 017 Bright Organ 000 127 019 Theater Organ 000 121 020 16’+2’ Organ 000 120 020 16’+4’ Organ 000 113 020 Chapel Organ 000 112 020 Church Organ 000 112 021 Reed Organ ACCORDION 000 112 022 Musette Accordion 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion 000 113 024 Bandoneon 000 113 023 Modern Harp 000 112 023 Harmonica GUITAR 000 112 025 Classical Guitar 000 112 026 Folk Guitar 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar 000 112 028 Clean Guitar 000 113 027 Octave Guitar 000 112 029 Muted Guitar 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar BASS 000 112 034 Finger Bass 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass 000 112 035 Pick Bass DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 112 036 Fretless Bass 000 112 037 Slap Bass 000 112 039 Synth Bass 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass 000 113 040 Dance Bass STRINGS 000 116 050 Live! Orchestra 000 112 049 String Ensemble 000 112 050 Chamber Strings 000 113 050 Slow Strings 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings 000 112 051 Synth Strings 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 112 041 Violin 000 112 043 Cello 000 112 044 Contrabass 000 112 047 Harp 000 112 106 Banjo 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 000 112 053 Choir 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble 000 112 055 Air Choir 000 112 054 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax 000 114 072 Sweet! Clarinet 000 118 067 Growl Sax 000 112 067 Tenor Sax 000 112 066 Alto Sax 000 112 065 Soprano Sax 000 112 068 Baritone Sax 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 112 072 Clarinet 000 112 069 Oboe 000 112 070 English Horn 000 112 071 Bassoon TRUMPET 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet 000 117 058 Sweet! Trombone 000 114 060 Sweet! Muted Trumpet 000 112 057 Trumpet 000 112 058 Trombone 000 113 058 Trombone Section 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet 000 112 061 French Horn 000 112 059 Tuba BRASS 000 112 062 Brass Section 000 113 062 Big Band Brass 000 113 063 80’s Brass 000 119 062 Mellow Horns 000 114 063 Techno Brass 000 112 063 Synth Brass Voice List Voice No. 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) FLUTE 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute 000 112 074 Flute 000 112 073 Piccolo 000 112 076 Pan Flute 000 112 075 Recorder 000 112 080 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 000 112 081 Square Lead 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 115 082 Analogon 000 119 082 Fargo 000 112 099 Star Dust 000 112 086 Voice Lead 000 112 101 Brightness SYNTH PAD 000 118 089 SweetHeaven 000 112 092 Xenon Pad 000 112 095 Equinox 000 112 089 Fantasia 000 113 090 Dark Moon 000 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 000 112 012 Vibraphone 000 112 013 Marimba 000 112 014 Xylophone 000 112 115 Steel Drums 000 112 009 Celesta 000 112 011 Music Box 000 112 015 Tubular Bells 000 112 048 Timpani DRUM KITS 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2 127 000 009 Room Kit 127 000 017 Rock Kit 127 000 025 Electronic Kit 127 000 026 Analog Kit 127 000 113 Dance Kit 127 000 033 Jazz Kit 127 000 041 Brush Kit 127 000 049 Symphony Kit 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2 ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Voice No. 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 *156 157 158 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 000 000 001 Grand Piano 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP 000 040 001 Piano Strings 000 041 001 Dream 000 000 002 Bright Piano 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP 000 032 003 Detuned CP80 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano 000 000 007 Harpsichord Voice No. 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2 000 000 008 Clavi 000 001 008 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 000 000 009 Celesta 000 000 010 Glockenspiel 000 000 011 Music Box 000 064 011 Orgel 000 000 012 Vibraphone 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP 000 000 013 Marimba 000 001 013 Marimba KSP 000 064 013 Sine Marimba 000 097 013 Balimba 000 098 013 Log Drums 000 000 014 Xylophone 000 000 015 Tubular Bells 000 096 015 Church Bells 000 097 015 Carillon 000 000 016 Dulcimer 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2 000 096 016 Cimbalom 000 097 016 Santur XG ORGAN 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 000 040 017 16+2’2/3 000 064 017 Organ Bass 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2 000 000 018 Percussive Organ 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ 000 033 018 Light Organ 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2 000 000 019 Rock Organ 000 064 019 Rotary Organ 000 065 019 Slow Rotary 000 066 019 Fast Rotary 000 000 020 Church Organ 000 032 020 Church Organ 3 000 035 020 Church Organ 2 000 040 020 Notre Dame 000 064 020 Organ Flute 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute 000 000 021 Reed Organ 000 040 021 Puff Organ 000 000 022 Accordion 000 000 023 Harmonica 000 032 023 Harmonica 2 000 000 024 Tango Accordion 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 000 096 025 Ukulele 000 000 026 Steel Guitar 000 035 026 12-string Guitar 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 000 096 026 Mandolin 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar 000 032 027 Jazz Amp 000 000 028 Clean Guitar 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar 000 000 029 Muted Guitar DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 125 Voice List Voice No. 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 *265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 126 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 040 029 Funk Guitar 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar 000 045 029 Jazz Man 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 000 000 034 Finger Bass 000 018 034 Finger Dark 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2 000 065 034 Modulated Bass 000 000 035 Pick Bass 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass 000 000 036 Fretless Bass 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass 000 041 040 DX Bass XG STRINGS 000 000 041 Violin 000 008 041 Slow Violin 000 000 042 Viola 000 000 043 Cello 000 000 044 Contrabass 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings 000 040 045 Suspense Strings 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp 000 040 047 Yang Chin 000 000 048 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 000 000 049 Strings 1 000 003 049 Stereo Strings 000 008 049 Slow Strings 000 035 049 60’s Strings 000 040 049 Orchestra 000 041 049 Orchestra 2 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra 000 045 049 Velocity Strings 000 000 050 Strings 2 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings 000 008 050 Legato Strings 000 040 050 Warm Strings 000 041 050 Kingdom 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2 000 000 053 Choir Aahs 000 003 053 Stereo Choir 000 032 053 Mellow Choir DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 040 053 Choir Strings 000 000 054 Voice Oohs 000 000 055 Synth Voice 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2 000 041 055 Choral 000 064 055 Analog Voice 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2 000 064 056 Impact XG BRASS 000 000 057 Trumpet 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet 000 000 058 Trombone 000 018 058 Trombone 2 000 000 059 Tuba 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet 000 000 061 French Horn 000 006 061 French Horn Solo 000 032 061 French Horn 2 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra 000 000 062 Brass Section 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2 000 018 064 Soft Brass 000 041 064 Choir Brass XG REED 000 000 065 Soprano Sax 000 000 066 Alto Sax 000 040 066 Sax Section 000 000 067 Tenor Sax 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 000 068 Baritone Sax 000 000 069 Oboe 000 000 070 English Horn 000 000 071 Bassoon 000 000 072 Clarinet XG PIPE 000 000 073 Piccolo 000 000 074 Flute 000 000 075 Recorder 000 000 076 Pan Flute 000 000 077 Blown Bottle 000 000 078 Shakuhachi 000 000 079 Whistle 000 000 080 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 000 000 081 Square Lead 000 006 081 Square Lead 2 000 008 081 LM Square 000 018 081 Hollow 000 019 081 Shroud 000 064 081 Mellow 000 065 081 Solo Sine 000 066 081 Sine Lead 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth 000 020 082 Big Lead 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog 000 000 083 Calliope Lead 000 065 083 Pure Lead 000 000 084 Chiff Lead 000 000 085 Charang Lead 000 064 085 Distorted Lead 000 000 086 Voice Lead 000 000 087 Fifths Lead 000 035 087 Big Five 000 000 088 Bass & Lead Voice List Voice No. 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 016 088 Big & Low 000 064 088 Fat & Perky 000 065 088 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 000 000 089 New Age Pad 000 064 089 Fantasy 000 000 090 Warm Pad 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad 000 000 092 Choir Pad 000 066 092 Itopia 000 000 093 Bowed Pad 000 000 094 Metallic Pad 000 000 095 Halo Pad 000 000 096 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 000 000 097 Rain 000 065 097 African Wind 000 066 097 Carib 000 000 098 Sound Track 000 027 098 Prologue 000 000 099 Crystal 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp 000 014 099 Popcorn 000 018 099 Tiny Bells 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes 000 041 099 Clear Bells 000 042 099 Chorus Bells 000 065 099 Soft Crystal 000 070 099 Air Bells 000 071 099 Bell Harp 000 072 099 Gamelimba 000 000 100 Atmosphere 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere 000 019 100 Hollow Release 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano 000 064 100 Nylon Harp 000 065 100 Harp Vox 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad 000 000 101 Brightness 000 000 102 Goblins 000 064 102 Goblins Synth 000 065 102 Creeper 000 067 102 Ritual 000 068 102 To Heaven 000 070 102 Night 000 071 102 Glisten 000 096 102 Bell Choir 000 000 103 Echoes 000 000 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 000 000 105 Sitar 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar 000 035 105 Sitar 2 000 097 105 Tamboura 000 000 106 Banjo 000 028 106 Muted Banjo 000 096 106 Rabab 000 097 106 Gopichant 000 098 106 Oud 000 000 107 Shamisen 000 000 108 Koto 000 096 108 Taisho-kin 000 097 108 Kanoon 000 000 109 Kalimba 000 000 110 Bagpipe 000 000 111 Fiddle 000 000 112 Shanai XG PERCUSSIVE 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell 000 096 113 Bonang 000 097 113 Altair Voice No. 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal 000 000 114 Agogo 000 000 115 Steel Drums 000 097 115 Glass Percussion 000 098 115 Thai Bells 000 000 116 Woodblock 000 096 116 Castanets 000 000 117 Taiko Drum 000 096 117 Gran Cassa 000 000 118 Melodic Tom 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2 000 065 118 Real Tom 000 066 118 Rock Tom 000 000 119 Synth Drum 000 064 119 Analog Tom 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 000 000 121 Fret Noise 000 000 122 Breath Noise 000 000 123 Seashore 000 000 124 Bird Tweet 000 000 125 Telephone Ring 000 000 126 Helicopter 000 000 127 Applause 000 000 128 Gunshot 064 000 001 Cutting Noise 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2 064 000 004 String Slap 064 000 017 Flute Key Click 064 000 033 Shower 064 000 034 Thunder 064 000 035 Wind 064 000 036 Stream 064 000 037 Bubble 064 000 038 Feed 064 000 049 Dog 064 000 050 Horse 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2 064 000 056 Maou 064 000 065 Phone Call 064 000 066 Door Squeak 064 000 067 Door Slam 064 000 068 Scratch Cut 064 000 069 Scratch Split 064 000 070 Wind Chime 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal 064 000 083 Car Passing 064 000 084 Car Crash 064 000 085 Siren 064 000 086 Train 064 000 087 Jet Plane 064 000 088 Starship 064 000 089 Burst 064 000 090 Roller Coaster 064 000 091 Submarine 064 000 097 Laugh 064 000 098 Scream 064 000 099 Punch 064 000 100 Heartbeat 064 000 101 Footsteps 064 000 113 Machine Gun 064 000 114 Laser Gun 064 000 115 Explosion 064 000 116 Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 127 Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “128: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C#0 D0 E0 F0 D#0 F#0 G0 G#0 A0 B0 C1 A#0 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 C#6 D6 E6 F6 G6 D#6 F#6 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 128 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 128 127/000/001 129 127/000/002 130 127/000/009 131 127/000/017 132 127/000/025 133 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll 2 Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy Open Rim Shot H Short Kick Tight Short Kick Short Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2 Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Short Kick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C#0 D0 E0 F0 D#0 F#0 G0 G#0 A0 B0 C1 A#0 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 C#6 D6 E6 F6 G6 D#6 F#6 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 128 127/000/001 134 127/000/113 135 127/000/033 136 127/000/041 137 127/000/049 138 126/000/001 139 126/000/002 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Soft 2 Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Kick Jazz Kick Small Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Tom Jazz 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cymbal 2 Train Jet Plane Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Maou DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 129 Style List Style No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 130 Style Name 8BEAT ChartPianoPop BritPopRock 8BeatModern Cool8Beat Classic8Beat 60’sGuitarPop 8BeatAdria 60’s8Beat BubblegumPop BritPopSwing OffBeat 60’sRock HardRock RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16BEAT 16Beat PianoPopShufle PopShuffle1 PopShuffle2 GuitarPop 16BeatUptempo KoolShuffle JazzRock HipHopLight BALLAD ChartPianoBld PopGtrBallad 80’sBallad PianoBallad LoveSong 6/8ModernEP 6/8SlowRock 6/8OrchBallad OrganBallad PopBallad 16BeatBallad1 16BeatBallad2 DANCE ClubBeat Electronica FunkyHouse MellowHipHop EuroTrance Ibiza DreamDance TechnoPolis Clubdance ClubLatin Garage UKPop HipHopGroove HipShuffle HipHopPop DISCO 70’sDisco1 70’sDisco2 LatinDisco DiscoPhilly SaturdayNight DiscoChocolate DiscoHands DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Style No. 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 Style Name SWING&JAZZ TradJazzPiano1 TradJazzPiano2 PianoBarBlues BigBandFast BigBandMedium BigBandBallad BigBandShuffle JazzClub Swing1 Swing2 OrchestraSwing Five/Four JazzBallad Dixieland Ragtime AfroCuban Charleston R&B Soul DetroitPop1 60’sRock&Roll 6/8Soul CrocoTwist Rock&Roll DetroitPop2 BoogieWoogie ComboBoogie 6/8Blues COUNTRY 70’sCountry Country8Beat CountryPop CountrySwing CountryBallad Country2/4 CowboyBoogie CountryShuffle Bluegrass LATIN BrazilianSamba BossaNova PopBossa Tijuana DiscoLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GuitarRumba RumbaFlamenco RumbaIsland Reggae BALLROOM VienneseWaltz EnglishWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstep Tango Pasodoble Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Style No. 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Style Name Jive TRADITIONAL USMarch 6/8March GermanMarch PolkaPop OberPolka Tarantella Showtune ChristmasSwing ChristmasWaltz ScottishReel Hawaiian WALTZ ItalianWaltz MariachiWaltz GuitarSerenade SwingWaltz JazzWaltz1 JazzWaltz2 CountryWaltz OberWaltzer Musette CHILDREN Learning2/4 Learning4/4 Learning6/8 Fun 3/4 Fun 4/4 PIANIST Stride PianoBlues1 PianoBlues2 PianoRag PianoRock&Roll PianoBoogie PianoJazzWaltz PianoJazzBld Arpeggio Musical Habanera SlowRock 8BtPianoBallad PianoMarch 6/8PianoMarch PianoWaltz PianoBeguine PianoSwing Music Database List MDB No. MDB Name ALL TIME HITS 1 Jude Hey 2 New UK 3 MyLoving 4 All OK 5 Buttercp 6 JustCall 7 CheepChp 8 Daddy's 9 Dance? 10 GetBack 11 GtrWheel 12 HighTide 13 IWasBorn 14 Sailing 15 BluJeans 16 Holiday 17 Imagine 18 LoveMe 19 LetItBld 20 LdyMdona 21 YelowSub 22 Marriage 23 MovinOut 24 My Shell 25 NowNever 26 DoLoveMe 27 TcktRide 28 SeeClear 29 Masachus 30 Hard Day 31 USA Pie 32 Norway 33 YesterBd MODERN POP 34 Watches 35 SoundMPH 36 Hold Us 37 Unfound 38 NeedSome 39 PrtTmLvr 40 MoonShdw 41 NikitSng 42 Sure of 43 Off Day 44 Tell Her 45 GirlsMne 46 NeedLove POP CLASSICS 47 Standing 48 RainLaff 49 Sunshine 50 ForNamdo 51 ThankFor 52 ManPiano 53 CoinLane 54 LovesYou 55 Tmbourin 56 Alone 57 GldField 58 Raindrop 59 SultanSw 60 Life'sWk 61 TopWorld MDB No. MDB Name 62 WatchGrl POP BALLAD 63 WnderLnd 64 CanIStop 65 EvryTime 66 IvoryAnd 67 TheWorld 68 LovWoman 69 Dolannes 70 Madigan 71 Paradise 72 Whisper BALLAD 73 AllOdds 74 AtonalFl 75 Hero 76 Woman 77 RunToYou 78 LoveOfAl 79 CndleWnd 80 Cavatina 81 Cherish 82 ToLoveMe 83 YouKnow 84 Evrythng 85 EyesOfBl 86 Hello 87 BeThere 88 FlyAway 89 LoveYou 90 NeverLet 91 JustOnce 92 IfYouGo 93 SavingAl 94 InTheDrk 95 LovePwr 96 Vision 97 Beautifl 98 AllAlone 99 Opposite 100 BeHonest 101 SayYou 102 SayNthng 103 Stranger 104 OneDay 105 TheBayou 106 ThisSong 107 Distance 108 ThisWay 109 LoveGone 110 Inspirng 111 TrueColr ROCK & ROLL 112 ShakenUp 113 Beethovn 114 HurryLov 115 BeCruel 116 Jumping 117 Countdwn 118 SuePeggy 119 Champion 120 Jailhous 121 BlueShoe 122 Rockin24 MDB No. MDB Name 123 Shouting 124 Rock&Rll 125 HonkyTnk OLDIES 126 Daydream 127 Sumertme 128 Diana's 129 Uptown 130 Apache 131 IGotIt 132 Tonight 133 MyPillow 134 NoRain 135 FInalDance 136 SlpnLion 137 Ghetto 138 LipsLcky 139 PrettyWm 140 TikiGtr 141 TurnThre 142 Sherry DANCE & DISCO 143 Babylon 144 Goodbye 145 Catch22 146 DISCO 147 Survival 148 TheNavy 149 DontHide 150 Celebrat 151 LondonRU 152 10,2 Sun 153 ShakeYou 154 Believe 155 BoySumer 156 I'mSexy 157 StuffHot SWING & JAZZ 158 Patrol 159 Charles 160 GiveLove 161 Rhythm 162 LOVE 163 LeroyBad 164 Caraban 165 Misbehav 166 Safari 167 Smiling 168 SoWhatIs 169 TimeGone 170 TasteHny 171 Sandman 172 Tunisian 173 TwoFoot 174 MyBaby R&B 175 AsPlayed 176 BabyGrov 177 Highwy66 178 SweetCHI 179 JustU&Me 180 ManLoves 181 OurLove 182 Wish I MDB No. MDB Name COUNTRY 183 OnTheRd 184 Breathe 185 InMyMind 186 ContryHw 187 GreenGrs 188 EverNeed 189 Lonesone 190 Lucille 191 HomeRng 192 Tennesse LATIN 193 Bananabt 194 DanceMng 195 DntWorry 196 Jamaica 197 FleaSpa 198 I'mPola 199 MamboJm 200 OneNote 201 PasoCani 202 SayNoMor 203 Beguine 204 Tijuana 205 Picture ENTERTAINMENT 206 OnTheHil 207 Barnacle 208 Califrag 209 DadClock 210 DanceLd 211 DnceFire 212 BigCntry 213 Cabaret 214 OdeToJoy 215 Mi-Re-Do 216 MyPrince 217 Necesary 218 NoBuiz 219 NoisyOld 220 Sleigh 221 RockBasy 222 Magnifiq 223 Magnfcnt 224 SilentNt 225 Nabucco 226 Standing 227 SummerPl 228 Christms 229 Favorite 230 Tubbie 231 Turkish 232 12OClock WALTZ & TRADITIONAL 233 Blk&Whte 234 CanCan 235 Charmain 236 Musicbox 237 Clementn 238 Doodah! 239 Dreamer 240 EnterRag 241 Birthday 242 MaryLamb MDB No. MDB Name 243 Donald's 244 MoonWlz 245 MoulinHt 246 Sunshine 247 PieceOf 248 GreenSlv 249 TakeFour 250 TexRose 251 ThePolka 252 Scarboro 253 Edelweis 254 AroundWd 255 Whatever 256 Yankee's WORLD 257 Hawaii 258 D'amor 259 ElCondor 260 GoodbyRm 261 ILandOn 262 ItalyBel 263 Cucarumb 264 Puntuali 265 Cielito 266 ItalySun 267 SantaLuc 268 Trumpetr 269 VanMass PIANIST 270 ItalySun 271 BeGood 272 Chaie's 273 Flower 274 Frenetic 275 Highwy66 276 Leaves 277 Miload 278 Cabaret 279 Wonderfl 280 Submarin 281 Mi-Re-Do 282 MoreRhum 283 NoBuiz 284 BeatifulSn 285 OhBlah 286 Charades 287 Sally's 288 Nabucco 289 Spanish 290 SunnyStr 291 MistyFln 292 LdnBridg 293 GrndClck 294 Importnc 295 Snowman 296 Favorite 297 SugerSpn 298 Washngtn 299 ThisWay 300 ZipperD DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 131 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM File Name 001Nutcr.mid 002Orphe.mid 003Slavo.mid 004Prima.mid 005Medit.mid 006Guill.mid 007Fruhl.mid 008Ungar.mid 009Fruhl.mid 010Dolly.mid 011Cande.mid 012Arabe.mid 013Pasto.mid 014Petit.mid 015Innoc.mid 016Progr.mid 017Taren.mid 018Cheva.mid 019Etude.mid 020Marci.mid 021Turki.mid 022Valse.mid 023Menue.mid 024Momen.mid 025Enter.mid 026Prelu.mid 027Violl.mid 028Angel.mid 029Saraf.mid 030Ameri.mid 031Brown.mid 032Lomon.mid 033Bonni.mid 034Londo.mid 035Banjo.mid 036Vogle.mid 037Lorel.mid 038Funic.mid 039Turke.mid 040Campt.mid 041Jingl.mid 042Muss.mid 043Liebe.mid 044Jesu.mid 045Joy.mid 046Pearl.mid 047Gavot.mid 048Seren.mid 049Menue.mid 050Canon.mid 051Vogel.mid 052Piano.mid 053Surpr.mid 054WildR.mid 055Chans.mid 056Babbi.mid 057RowRo.mid 058Smoky.mid 059WeWis.mid 060ImMai.mid 061Chris.mid 062MaryH.mid 063TenLi.mid 064PopGo.mid 065Twink.mid 066Close.mid 067Cucko.mid 068Augus.mid 069Londo.mid 070Three.mid Song Name Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances op.72-2 La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation (Thaïs) Guillaume Tell Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Frühlingsstimmen Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” Marcia alla Turca Turkish March Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” Menuett Moments Musicaux op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Angels Serenade Krasnyj Sarafan America the Beautiful Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond My Bonnie Londonderry Air Ring de Banjo Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi Funicula Turkey in the Straw Camptown Races Jingle Bells Muss i denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Ode to Joy Pearl Fisher Gavotte Serenade/Haydn Menuett BWV. Anh.114 Canon in D Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die Zauberflöte” Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 To a Wild Rose Chanson du Toreador O Mio Babbino Caro Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Im Mai (DUET) O Christmas Tree (DUET) Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Ten Little Indians (DUET) Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) The Cuckoo (DUET) O du lieber Augustin (DUET) London Bridge (DUET) Three Blind Mice (DUET) The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data. 132 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Composer P.I. Tchaikovsky J. Offenbach ˇ A. Dvorák A. Vivaldi J. Massenet G. Rossini F. Mendelssohn J. Brahms J. Strauss II T.Oesten J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller F.Chopin L.v. Beethoven W.A. Mozart F.Chopin L. Boccherini F. Schubert S. Joplin J.S. Bach L.Streabbog Traditional Traditional S.A. Ward Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S.C. Foster Traditional F. Silcher L. Denza Traditional S.C. Foster J.S. Pierpont F. Silcher F. Liszt J.S. Bach L.v. Beethoven G. Bizet F.J. Gossec F.J. Haydn J.S. Bach J. Pachelbel W.A. Mozart L.v. Beethoven F.J. Haydn E.A. MacDowell G. Bizet G. Puccini Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S. Winner Traditional Traditional J.J. Rousseau Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Effect Type List ● Harmony Types No. Harmony Type 01 Duet 02 Trio 03 Block 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note Description Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. 3 3 Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 32). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. • The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 ● Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description 01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. 03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. Off No effect. 05 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 133 134 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Change Control 0,32 1,11,84 6,38 7,10 64 71 72 73 74 91,93 96-97 100-101 Key’s Ch’s After Touch Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o x o o o x o x x o x o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 9nH,v=0 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number 1 - 16 x Default Changed Basic Channel Function... Transmitted o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 x Recognized YAMAHA [ Portable Grand ] Model DGX-530/YPG-535 MIDI Implementation Chart Sustain Harmonic Content Release Time Attack Time Brightness Effect Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB Data Entry Bank Select Remarks Date:10-OCT-2007 Version:1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart : True # x x x x o x Aux o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 *1 Refer to #2 on page 136. Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset o o x x x o o 0 - 127 ************** System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune System Exclusive Prog Change o : Yes x : No MIDI Implementation Chart DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 135 MIDI Data Format NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type and Chorus Type. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”. <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 136) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 136) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. ■ Effect map * When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest to the specified value) is automatically set. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display. ● REVERB TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 00 000 No Effect 001 (01)Hall1 002 Room 003 004 005...127 01 02 08 16 17 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2 18 (04)Room1 19 20 (05)Room2 No Effect ● CHORUS TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 000...063 00 064 Thru 065 Chorus 066 Celeste 067 Flanger 068...127 136 01 02 08 16 17 No Effect No Effect DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual (02)Chorus2 (01)Chorus1 (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2 18 19 20 ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation. Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 8. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 137 SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product. The Product is copyright © 1987-2007 Sibelius Software, a division of Avid Technology, Inc, and its licensors. 1. Definitions In this License the following words and expressions have the following meanings: “License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in this agreement. “Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK “Product”: the Software and the Documentation. “Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki, Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or files supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the Sibelius Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer. “Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor. 2. License 2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable license to use this Software in accordance with the Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are reserved. You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form. You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, (1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for the purpose of error correction); (2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or incorporated into any other program, file or product, for any purpose; or (3) use the Software to create files in any format (other than temporary files created and required by your computer’s operating system or web browser), including without limitation screen capture files, files generated from the Software’s playback, graphics files and print files, for any purpose, except for creating MIDI files (if permitted by the Software) for private non-commercial use. You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the Software in whole or in part for any purpose. You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate, convert, decode or reverse engineer any file capable of being read by any copy or version of the Software or any data transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in whole or in part for any purpose. The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity. 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 3. Copyright 3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and in the components of the Product as between you and the Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is protected by copyright laws, national and international, and all other applicable laws. 4. Disclaimer of Liability 4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation any warranties that the Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with the Documentation, is merchantable, or is fit for any particular purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data and loss of profits, revenue or goodwill and any type of special, indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in connection with your installation and use of the Product. 5. Termination 5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to terminate this License in the event of a material breach by you of any condition of this License or of any of your representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder. Upon notification of such termination by the Licensor, you will immediately delete the Software from your computer and destroy the Documentation. 6. Miscellaneous 6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by law. You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or otherwise transfer the Product to any third party. You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time. This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a final expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof. (This section only applies if you are resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts. (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License shall be brought and maintained only in the United States District Court for the Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding. Each party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial by jury in any suit, action or proceeding (including any counterclaim), whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof. 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 (License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007) 138 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Specifications Keyboards • 88-key box type (A-1–C7), with Touch Response. Display • 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX • LCD CONTRAST Panel Controls • SONG, VOICE, STYLE, EASY SONG ARRANGER, P.A.T. ON/OFF, LESSON L, LESSON R, LESSON START, METRONOME ON/OFF, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO, FUNCTION, MUSIC DATABASE, HARMONY ON/OFF, DUAL ON/OFF, SPLIT ON/OFF, TEMPO/TAP, [0]–[9], [+], [-], CATEGORY, Dial, REPEAT & LEARN (ACMP ON/OFF), A-B REPEAT (INTRO/ENDING/rit.), PAUSE (SYNC START), START/STOP, REW (MAIN/AUTO FILL), FF (SYNC STOP), REGIST MEMORY ([MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2]), SONG MEMORY (REC, [1]–[5], [A]), File Control [MENU], File Control [EXECUTE], [EXIT], [LYRICS], [SCORE], [CHORD FINGERING] Realtime Control • Pitch Bend Wheel Voice • • • • 127 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices Polyphony: 32 DUAL SPLIT Style • 160 Preset Styles + External files • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi Finger, Full Keyboard • Style Volume Music Database • 300 + External files Education Feature • Dictionary • Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn Registration Memory Song • 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs (70) • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume • Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Performance assistant technology • Chord, Chord/Free, Melody, Chord/Melody Recording • Song User Song: Recording Tracks: 5 Songs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE MIDI • Local On/Off • Keyboard Out • Initial Send • Style Out • External Clock • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 6W + 6W Speakers • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 Power Consumption • 22W Power Supply • Adaptor: PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Dimensions (W x D x H) • 1,340 x 422 x 145 mm (52-3/4” x 16-5/8” x 5-3/4”) with keyboard stand: 1,354 x 485 x 775 mm (53-1/3” x 19-1/8” x 30-1/2”) Weight • 11.0kg (24 lbs. 4 oz.) with keyboard stand: 17.0kg (37 lbs. 8 oz.) Supplied Accessories • Music Rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Keyboard Stand • Owner’s Manual • Footswitch FC5 • AC Power adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) * May not be included depending on your particular area. • 8 banks x 2 types Function • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • • • • • • • • • • • • Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Pitch Bend Range, Chord Fingering MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level DUAL VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level SPLIT VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type, Sustain HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume Performance assistant technology: Performance assistant technology Type PC: PC Mode MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Metronome Volume SCORE: Quantize LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade UTILITY: Demo Cancel, Language Optional Accessories • Headphones: HPE-150 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Effects • Reverb: 9 types • Chorus: 4 types • Harmony: 26 types DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 139 Index Panel controls and terminals 140 r f +/– .................................................. 14, 65 ........................................................ 66 0–9 .................................................. 14, 65 A-B REPEAT ................................. 14, 85 ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 14, 26 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] ........... 14, 65 Chord Fingering ............................. 14, 83 DC IN 12V ..................................... 12, 15 DEMO ............................................ 14, 33 Dial ................................................. 14, 65 DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 14, 18 EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 14, 56 EXECUTE ...................................... 14, 94 EXIT ............................................... 14, 66 FF ................................................... 14, 32 FILE CONTROL ........................... 14, 92 FUNCTION .................................... 14, 89 HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 14, 68 INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 14, 76 LCD CONTRAST .......................... 15, 67 LESSON L, R ................................. 14, 49 LESSON START ........................... 14, 48 LYRICS .......................................... 14, 36 MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 14, 76 MASTER VOLUME ..................... 13–14 MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 14, 87 MENU ............................................ 14, 92 METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 14, 22 MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 14, 55 P.A.T. ON/OFF ........................ 14, 38, 46 PAUSE ........................................... 14, 32 PC ....................................................... 103 PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 12, 15 PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 14, 71 PORTABLE GRAND .................... 14, 20 REC, 1–5, A ................................... 14, 58 REGIST MEMORY ....................... 14, 87 REPEAT & LEARN ...................... 14, 54 REW ............................................... 14, 32 SCORE ........................................... 14, 35 SONG ............................................. 14, 31 SONG MEMORY .......................... 14, 59 SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 14, 19 STANDBY/ON .............................. 13–14 START/STOP ................................ 14, 65 STYLE ............................... 14, 25–29, 76 SUSTAIN ....................................... 12, 15 SYNC START ......................... 14, 26, 77 SYNC STOP .................................. 14, 78 TEMPO/TAP ...................... 14, 22, 32, 72 USB TO DEVICE .................. 15, 92, 100 USB TO HOST ............................ 15, 100 VOICE ............................................ 14, 17 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Alphabetical order A F A-B Repeat ...........................................85 Accessories .............................................7 ACMP ...................................................26 Auto Accompaniment Range ................26 Auto-Accompaniment ..............26, 28, 30 File Control .......................................... 92 File Name ............................................. 95 Flash Memory ...................................... 34 Foot Switch .......................................... 12 Format (File Control) ........................... 94 Function ................................... 66, 89–91 Function Display .................................. 66 B Backup ..........................................63, 106 G C CD-ROM ............................................107 Chord ..................................28–30, 81–82 Chord Dictionary ..................................84 Chord Fingering ..............................30, 83 Chord root .............................................84 Chord type (Chord Dictionary) .............84 Chord type (performance assistant technology) ...................37–38 Chord/Free type (performance assistant technology) ...................37, 40 Chord/Melody type (performance assistant technology) ...................37, 44 Chorus ...................................................70 Chorus Type .......................................133 Computer ............................101–102, 104 D Default Setting ......................................89 Delete (File Control) .............................98 Delete (Song Track) ..............................62 Delete (User Song) ...............................61 Demo ....................................................33 Demo Cancel ........................................91 Display ............................................66–67 Double-Staff Score ...............................35 Drum Kit ...............................................21 Drum Kit List ......................................128 Dual Chorus Level ................................90 Dual Octave ..........................................90 Dual Pan ...............................................90 Dual Reverb Level ................................90 Dual Voice ............................................18 Dual Volume .........................................90 E Easy Chords ..........................................30 Easy Song Arranger ..............................56 Effect Map ..........................................136 Effect Type List ..................................133 External Clock ..............................91, 102 External Song .......................................34 Grade .................................................... 51 H Harmony ............................................... 68 Harmony Type ................................... 133 Harmony Volume ................................. 91 Headphones .......................................... 12 I Initial Send ......................................... 104 Initialization ......................................... 63 K Keyboard Out ............................... 91, 102 Keyboard Stand Assembly ................... 10 L Language .............................................. 16 Lesson .................................................. 48 Load ..................................................... 97 Local ............................................. 91, 102 L-Part ........................................... 91, 106 Lyric ..................................................... 36 M Main Chorus Level ............................... 90 MAIN Display ...................................... 66 Main Octave ......................................... 90 Main Pan .............................................. 90 Main Reverb Level ............................... 90 Main Voice ........................................... 17 Main Volume ....................................... 90 Master EQ Type ............................. 74, 90 Measure ................................................ 67 Melody ........................................... 35, 47 Melody Score ....................................... 35 Melody type (performance assistant technology) .................. 37, 42 Melody Voice ................................. 57, 86 Messages ............................................ 116 Index Metronome ........................................... 22 MIDI ................................................... 102 MIDI Data Format .............................. 136 MIDI Implementation Chart ............... 134 Music Database .................................... 55 Music Rest ............................................ 13 Mute ..................................................... 86 N notation ................................................. 67 O One Touch Setting ................................ 73 P P.A.T. Type .................................... 37, 91 Panel Sustain .................................. 71, 90 PC Mode ............................................. 103 performance assistant technology ........ 37 Pitch Bend Range ................................. 90 Power Adaptor ..................................... 12 Preset Song ............................... 31, 33–34 Q Quantize ............................................... 91 R Recording ............................................. 58 Registration Memory ........................... 87 Remote control ................................... 103 Repeat ............................................. 54, 85 Reverb .................................................. 69 Reverb Type ....................................... 133 R-Part ........................................... 91, 106 S Save (File Control) ............................... 95 Score ....................................... 35, 47, 118 Single-Staff Score ................................ 35 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 96 SMF Save ............................................. 96 Software Licensing Agreement .......... 137 Song ...................................................... 31 Song Clear ............................................ 61 Song List .............................................. 33 Song Memory ................................. 58–59 Song Out ....................................... 91, 102 Song Volume ........................................ 85 Specifications ..................................... 139 Split Chorus Level ................................ 90 Split Octave ..........................................90 Split Pan ................................................90 Split Point .......................................19, 79 Split Reverb Level ................................90 Split Voice ............................................19 Split Volume .........................................90 Standard Chords ...................................30 Style ..........................................25, 28, 76 Style File .........................................83, 97 Style List .............................................130 Style Out .......................................91, 102 Style Volume ........................................80 Sustain (Footswitch) .............................12 Sustain (Panel) ................................71, 90 Synchro Start ..................................26, 77 Synchro Stop .........................................78 T Tempo .............................................32, 72 TimeSignature (Denominator, Numerator) ...............23 Touch Response ....................................72 Touch Sensitivity ..................................72 Track .....................................................58 Track Clear ...........................................62 Transfer .......................................102, 104 Transpose ..............................................75 Troubleshooting ..........................112, 114 Tuning ...................................................75 U USB-MIDI Driver .......................110–111 User file ..........................................95, 97 User File Save .......................................95 User Song .......................................34, 58 V Voice .....................................................17 Voice List ...........................................124 X XF .....................................................6, 36 XGlite .....................................................6 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 141 LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, NPV, PSRE, PSREW, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. © 2015 Yamaha Corporation of America. For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. MALTA NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: +1-714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México, D.F., C.P. 03900 Tel: +52-55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil Tel: +55-11-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +54-11-4119-7000 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: +31-347-358040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A. AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza, Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela Tel: +58-212-943-1877 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: +39-02-93577-1 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki, Greece Tel: +30-210-6686260 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46-31-89-34-00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Denmark, Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark Tel: +45-44-92-49-00 FINLAND Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama, P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: +44-1908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen, Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: +41-44-3878080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: +48-22-880-08-88 Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: +359-2-978-20-25 CYPRUS Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd. Nikis Ave 2k 1086 Nicosia Tel: + 357-22-511080 Major Music Center 21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus Tel: (392) 227 9213 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 ITALY SWEDEN VENEZUELA BULGARIA Olimpus Music Ltd. Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta Tel: +356-2133-2093 F-Musiikki Oy Antaksentie 4 FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland Tel: +358 (0)96185111 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway Tel: +47-6716-7800 ICELAND Hljodfaerahusid Ehf. Sidumula 20 IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: +354-525-5050 CROATIA Euro Unit D.O.O. Slakovec 73 40305 Nedelisce Tel: +38540829400 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: +7-495-626-5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 AFRICA Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90-212-999-8010 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: +86-400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: +852-2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Private Limited Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002, Haryana, India Tel: +91-124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea Tel: +82-2-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: +65-6740-9200 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist. New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: +886-2-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: +66-2215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, VIC 3006, Australia Tel: +61-3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: +64-9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com DMI15 Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan (For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2016 Yamaha Corporation WM36660 Published 02/2016 PO##*.*-**B0 Printed in China
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126
  • Page 127 127
  • Page 128 128
  • Page 129 129
  • Page 130 130
  • Page 131 131
  • Page 132 132
  • Page 133 133
  • Page 134 134
  • Page 135 135
  • Page 136 136
  • Page 137 137
  • Page 138 138
  • Page 139 139
  • Page 140 140
  • Page 141 141
  • Page 142 142
  • Page 143 143
  • Page 144 144

Yamaha YPG-535 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Sintetizador
Tipo
El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para